Operating Instructions
audio/video multi-channel receiver
IMPORTANT
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
"dangerous voltage" within the product's
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by
the manufacturer.
1) Read these instructions.
2) Keep these instructions.
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or
table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with
the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution
when moving the cart/apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
3) Heed all warnings.
4) Follow all instructions.
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.
6) Clean only with dry cloth.
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce
heat.
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized
or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms
or when unused for long periods of time.
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has
been damaged in any way, such as power-supply
cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled
or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the
apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
P1-4-2-2_En
blades with one wider than the other.
A
grounding type plug has two blades and a third
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third
prong are provided for your safety. If the provided
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an
electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience
receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
WARNING
This product is for general household purposes. Any
failure due to use for other than household purposes
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires
repair will be charged for even during the warranty
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire
or shock hazard, do not place any container filled
with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or
flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain
period.
K041_En
or moisture.
D3-4-2-1-3_B_En
WARNING
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following
section carefully.
The voltage of the available power supply differs
according to country or region. Be sure that the
power supply voltage of the area where this unit
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V
or 120 V) written on the rear panel.
D3-4-2-1-4_A_En
This product contains mercury. Disposal of this
material may be regulated due to environmental
considerations. For disposal or recycling
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or
cords associated with accessories sold with the
product will expose you to chemicals listed on
proposition 65 known to the State of California and
other governmental entities to cause cancer and
birth defect or other reproductive harm.
information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronics Industries Alliance : www.eiae.org.
K057_En
Wash hands after handling
D36-P4_A_En
For U.S. and Australia Model
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
The equipment should be disconnected by removing
the mains plug from the wall socket when left
unused for a long period of time (for example, when
on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate
your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.
Contents
01 Before you start
05 Listening to your system
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Checking what’s in the box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Loading the batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Auto playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using the Home THX modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Listening in stereo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Using Stream Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Selecting MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Choosing the input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Using surround back channel processing . . . . . . . . . 34
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . . 34
Using the genre synchronizing function. . . . . . . . . . . 35
02 5 minute guide
Introduction to home theater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Listening to Surround Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup . . . . 11
Playing a source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Better sound using Phase Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
06 Using the tuner
03 Connecting your equipment
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Improving FM stereo sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Using Neural THX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Tuning directly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Saving station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Naming station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
When making cable connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
About the video converter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
About HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting your TV and DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting your Blu-ray disc player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver
07 The System Setup menu
Making receiver settings from the System
or other set-top box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR
and other video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Using the component video jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connecting digital audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
About the WMA9 Pro decoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Connecting analog audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Connecting a component to the front panel inputs . . . 20
Installing your speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Placing the speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
THX speaker system setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting external antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Plugging in the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Surround back speaker setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fine Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Fine Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Speaker Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
X-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
THX Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
04 Controls and displays
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Operating range of remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . 26
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5
En
ZONE Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat panel TVs. . . . . . . . . . . . 72
OSD Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
08 Other connections
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Connecting your iPod to the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
iPod playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Connecting your USB device to the receiver . . . . . . 54
Basic playback controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Compressed audio compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Using XM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Connecting your XM Radio receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Listening to XM Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using XM HD Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Saving channel presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using the XM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Using SIRIUS Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Connecting your SiriusConnect™ Tuner. . . . . . . . . . 57
Listening to SIRIUS Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Saving channel presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Using the SIRIUS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs. . . . . . . . 59
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . . 59
Speaker B setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Bi-amping your front speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Bi-wiring your speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Connecting additional amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
MULTI-ZONE listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Making MULTI-ZONE connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Connecting an IR receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Switching components on and off
11 Using other functions
Setting the Audio options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Setting the Video options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Making an audio or a video recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Using the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Dimming the display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Switching the speaker impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Checking your system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
12 Controlling the rest of your system
Setting the remote to control other components. . . . 78
Selecting preset codes directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Controls for TVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Controls for other components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Operating other Pioneer components
with this receiver’s sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
13 Additional information
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
No sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output . . . . . 86
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Important information regarding
using the 12 volt trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat panel TV . . . . . 64
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer flat panel TV. . . 65
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output . . . . . 66
Advanced MCACC output using your PC . . . . . . . . . 66
09 HDMI Control
Making the HDMI Control connections. . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Setting the HDMI options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Setting the HDMI Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Before using synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Synchronized amp mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Synchronized amp mode operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
About HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
the HDMI connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
XM radio messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
SIRIUS radio messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Dolby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
DTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional . . . . . . . . . . . 92
About THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
About Neural – THX Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
About XM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
About SIRIUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Listening modes with different input
10 Other Settings
The Input Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Input function default and possible settings . . . . . . 70
The Other Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Multi Channel Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
signal formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Stream direct with different input signal formats. . . . 101
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Cleaning the unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6
En
Before you start
01
Chapter 1:
Before you start
Furthermore, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD,
which are designed for the next-generation high-
definition media such as Blu-ray Disc and HD DVD,
support up to 7.1 channels and 8 channels respectively.
Features
•
Advanced Direct Energy design
This receiver offers a new advancement in discrete
design unique to Pioneer for high-power drivability, low
distortion and stable imaging. Through a circuit design
that minimizes the energy loss of the amplifier for each of
the channels, this receiver generates equal amplifier
power to all channels, eliminating the possibility of one
channel dominating a particular sound field.
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology
supporting up to 5.1 channels, with fixed data transfer
rates ranging from 24 kbps to 256 kbps (this encoding is
available only when signals are delivered to this receiver
as primary audio).
DTS-HD Master Audio delivers audio signals to listeners
without any loss of data with its high transfer rates.
•
Easy setup using Advanced MCACC
•
Phase Control
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate
surround sound setup, which includes the advanced
features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ. This
innovative technology measures the reverb
characteristics of your listening area, allowing you to
customize your system calibration with the help of a
graphical output that can be displayed on-screen or
using computer. With the additional benefits of
numerous MCACC preset memories, standing wave
control and microphone measurements from a series of
reference points, your home theater experience can be
truly customized for optimal surround sound.
The Phase Control technology incorporated into this
receiver’s design provides coherent sound reproduction
through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound
image at your listening position.
•
Sound Retriever
The Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology
that helps bring CD quality sound back to WMA, MP3
and MPEG-4 AAC audio files by restoring sound pressure
and smoothing jagged artifacts left over after
compression.
•
Front Stage Surround Advance
•
THX Select2 Plus certified design
With the Front Stage Surround Advance feature, you can
enjoy seamless, natural surround sound effects using
only the front speakers, without deteriorating the quality
of the original sound.
This receiver bears the THX Select2 Plus logo, which
means it has passed a rigorous series of quality and
performance tests covering every aspect of the product.
This includes testing of pre-amplifier and power amplifier
performance and operation, and hundreds of other
parameters in both the digital and analog domain,
making your home theater experience as faithful as
possible to what the director intended.
•
Auto Level Control
When the source is played in Auto level control stereo
mode (A.L.C.), this receiver automatically equalizes the
playback sound level according to the variation in
recording levels between music sources recorded in the
portable audio player.
•
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding, including Dolby
Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES, Dolby
Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-EXPRESS and DTS-HD
Master Audio
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding brings theater sound
right into your home with up to six channels of surround
sound, including a special LFE (Low Frequency Effects)
channel for deep, realistic sound effects.
•
HDMI and digital video conversion
This receiver is compatible with the HDMI digital video
format, providing you with high-definition digital video/
audio via a single cable.
High-quality sound formats such as DTS-HD and Dolby
TrueHD are supported while this receiver is also
compatible with the DeepColor feature. You can operate
this receiver in synchronization with your Pioneer
component that supports the HDMI Control function by
connecting your component to this receiver via HDMI.
Also, the built-in digital video converter of this receiver
makes both de-interlacing and up-scaling possible, and
analog video signals being input are converted and
output as digital video signals at the HDMI terminal.
The built-in Dolby Pro Logic IIx and DTS Neo:6 decoders
not only provide full surround sound decoding for Dolby
Surround sources, but will also generate convincing
surround sound for any stereo source.
Also, with the addition of a surround back speaker, you
can take advantage of the built-in Dolby Digital EX and
DTS-ES decoders for six-channel surround sound.
7
En
Before you start
01
•
iPod and USB Ready
This receiver has the terminals for connecting an iPod
unit and a USB mass storage device.
Loading the batteries
The iPod terminal is ready for handling digital audio, and
this receiver’s enhanced compatibility makes on-screen
control of your iPod an added possibility.
The USB terminal allows you to listen to two-channel
audio from a USB mass storage device connected to this
receiver.
•
XM and SIRIUS Ready
Caution
With the new XM and SIRIUS Radio terminals, you’ll be
up and running in no time. This receiver’s enhanced
compatibility makes XM HD Surround playback as well
as on-screen control of XM and SIRIUS Radio an added
possibility.
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as
leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:
• Never use new and old batteries together.
• Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries
properly according to the marks in the battery case.
• Batteries with the same shape may have different
voltages. Do not use different batteries together.
Checking what’s in the box
Please check that you’ve received the following supplied
accessories:
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply
with governmental regulations or environmental
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or
area.
• Setup microphone (cable: 5 m (16.4 ft.))
• Remote control unit
• WARNING
• AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries x2
• AM loop antenna
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the
life or performance of batteries.
• FM wire antenna
• Warranty card
• These operating instructions
Installing the receiver
• When installing this receiver, make sure to put it on a
level and stable surface.
Don’t install it on the following places:
– on a color TV (the screen may distort)
– near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off
a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.
– in direct sunlight
– in damp or wet areas
– in extremely hot or cold areas
– in places where there is vibration or other movement
– in places that are very dusty
– in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)
8
En
5 minute guide
02
C5hampteri2n: ute guide
Where you place the speakers will have a big effect on the
sound. Place your speakers as shown below for the best
surround sound effect. Also see Placing the speakers on
page 22 for more on this.
Introduction to home theater
Home theater refers to the use of multiple audio tracks to
create a surround sound effect, making you feel like
you’re in the middle of the action or concert. The
surround sound you get from a home theater system
depends not only on your speaker setup, but also on the
source and the sound settings of the receiver.
Center (C)
Front
Right (R)
Front
Left (L)
Surround
Right (SR)
Subwoofer (SW)
This receiver will automatically decode multichannel
Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround sources according
to your speaker setup. In most cases, you won’t have to
make changes for realistic surround sound, but other
possibilities (like listening to a CD with multichannel
surround sound) are explained in Listening to your
system on page 30.
Surround
Back Right (SBR)
Listening
position
Surround
Left (SL)
Surround Back Left (SBL)
3
Plug in the receiver and switch it on, followed by
Listening to Surround Sound
your DVD player, your subwoofer and the TV.
Plug the power cable into the AC outlet and switch on the
receiver. Make sure you’ve set the video input on your TV
to this receiver. Check the manual that came with the TV
if you don’t know how to do this.
This receiver was designed with the easiest possible
setup in mind, so with the following quick setup guide,
you should have your system hooked up for surround
sound in no time at all. In most cases, you can simply
leave the receiver in the default settings.
1
• Set the subwoofer volume to a comfortable level.
• Be sure to complete all connections before
connecting this receiver to an AC power source.
4
Use the on-screen automatic MCACC setup to set up
your system.
1
Connect your TV and DVD player.
See Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto
MCACC) on page 10 for more on this.
See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 17 to do
this. For surround sound, you’ll want to hook up using a
digital connection from the DVD player to the receiver.
5
Play a DVD, and adjust the volume to your liking.
Make sure that DVD is showing in the receiver’s display,
indicating that the DVD input is selected. If it isn’t, press
DVD on the remote control to set the receiver to the DVD
input.
2
Connect your speakers and place them for optimal
surround sound.
Connect your speakers as shown in Installing your
speaker system on page 21.
In addition to the basic playback explained in Playing a
source on page 11, there are several other sound options
you can select. See Listening to your system on page 30
for more on this.
See also Making receiver settings from the System Setup
menu on page 38 for more setup options.
Note
1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 15-second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during this process.
The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. When you set the
HDMI Control mode to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the HDMI Control feature, see HDMI Control on page 67.
9
En
5 minute guide
02
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the
MCACC SETUP MIC jack:
Automatically setting up for surround
sound (Auto MCACC)
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
VIDEO
L
R
DIGITAL IN
PHONES
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ST
–
ST
+
The Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic
characteristics of your listening area, taking into account
ambient noise, speaker size and distance, and tests for
both channel delay and channel level. After you have set
up the microphone provided with your system, the
receiver uses the information from a series of test tones
to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your
particular room.
The Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone
is connected.
1
1.Auto MCACC
Surround Back System
[
Normal
]
Save SYMMETRY to
[
M1.MEMORY
START
1
]
Make sure you do this before moving on to Playing a
source on page 11.
ENTER:Start
:Cancel
Important
3
Make sure ‘Normal’ is selected,2 select an MCACC
preset3, then select START4
Follow the instructions on-screen.
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not
moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.
.
4
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re
using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to
a comfortable volume level.
• Before using the Auto MCACC Setup, the
headphones should be disconnected and the iPod
USB, XM or SIRIUS Radio function should not be
selected as an input source.
5
Wait for the test tones to finish, then confirm the
speaker configuration in the OSD.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while
Caution
5
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are
output at high volume.
it’s doing this.
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in
step 6.
AUDIO
VIDEO
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
EXIT
TUNE TOOLS
MEM
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
TOP MENU
ST
MENU
T.EDIT
RECEIVER
DVD
DVR 1
FM/AM
BD
TV
CD
HDMI
CD-R
ENTER
ST
DVR 2
CATEGORY
RETURN
MAIN
ZONE
2
XM
SIRIUS iPod USB
SETUP TUNE
iPod CTRL
INPUT
1
2
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC
jack on the front panel.
Place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your
normal listening position (use a tripod if possible). Make
sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and
the microphone.
Note
1 • You can’t use the System Setup menu in either the main or sub zone when the iPod USB, XM or SIRIUS Radio input source is selected. When you set
ZONE 2 to ON (page 62), you can’t use the System Setup menu.
• If you cancel the Auto MCACC Setup, or leave an error message for over three minutes, the screen saver will appear.
2 • If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back speaker
setting on page 41 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 4.
• If you have THX-certified speakers, select CUSTOM and choose YES for the THX Speaker setting.
3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can
rename it later in Data Management on page 46).
4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select CUSTOM to save other correction curves (such as ALL CH ADJUST and
FRONT ALIGN). See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 38 for more on this.
5 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.
10
En
5 minute guide
02
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient
noise! or Check Microphone.) select RETRY after
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when
using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 11) and
verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to
be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and
continue.
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup
If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto
MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the
walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the
microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check
for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan,
etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch
them off if necessary. If there are any instructions
showing in the front panel display, please follow them.
1.Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing
1.Auto MCACC
CHECK
…
(2/9)
Front
Center
Surr
SB
[
[
[
YES
YES
YES
]
]
]
]
]
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of
the microphone. If this seems to be happening,
switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.
Environment Check
Ambient Noise
Microphone
[
[
YES
YES
x
2
[
[
[
OK
]
]
]
SW
Speaker YES/NO
OK
:Cancel
ENTER:Next
:Cancel
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the
1
Playing a source
actual speakers you have.
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such
as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side
column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t
correct), there may be a problem with the speaker
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the
power and check the speaker connections. If there
doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use /
to select the speaker and / to change the setting
(and number for surround back) and continue.
4
SR+
7
5
SBch
8
6
A.ATT
RECEIVER
SOURCE
CATEGORY
RETURN
9
CLASS
SETUP TUNE
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
iPod CTRL
ENTER
0
DVD
DVR 1
FM/AM
BD
DVR 2
XM
TV
CD
HDMI
CD-R
MASTER
VOLUME
INPUT
AUTO/
STEREO/
A.L.C.
BD MENU
STANDARD
ADV SURR
DIRECT
HDD
DVD
TV CONTROL
SIRIUS iPod USB
THX
STATUS
PHASE
CH
VOL
MUTE
INPUT
SELECT
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
MEM
DIMMER
6
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.
AUDIO
PARAMETER
VIDEO
1
2
3
PARAMETER
AUDIO
DISPLAY
CH
GENRE
MCACC
SLEEP
EXIT
TUNE TOOLS
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the
optimum receiver settings for Channel Level, Speaker
Distance, Standing Wave and Acoustic Cal EQ.
4
5
6
1
Switch on your system components and receiver.
Start by switching on the playback component (for
example a DVD player), your TV and subwoofer (if you
have one), then the receiver (press RECEIVER).
4
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
• Make sure the setup mic is disconnected.
7
The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! Press RETURN
2
Select the input source you want to play.
to go back to the System Setup menu.2
You can use the input source buttons on the remote
control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel controls.
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver
upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup.
5
3
Press AUTO/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/STREAM
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the
DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO SURROUND’ and start
playback of the source.6
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound
DVD disc, you should hear surround sound. If you are
playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the
front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.
3
System Setup menu (starting on page 38).
• See also Listening to your system on page 30 for
information on different ways of listening to sources.
Note
1 If you’re using the front panel display, the diagram in Listening to Surround Sound on page 9 indicates (in bold) how each speaker is displayed.
2 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen. See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 38 for more on this.
3 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will end up with different size
settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 48.
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and
room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
4 Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO 1 jacks on your TV, make sure that the
VIDEO 1 input is now selected).
5 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 33).
6 • You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and
88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.
• Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this case, the receiver must be set to a
multichannel listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 30 if you need to do this) if you want multichannel surround sound.
11
En
5 minute guide
02
It is possible to check on the display whether or not multi-
channel playback is being performed properly.
Phase Control ON
Front speaker
Listening
position
When using a surround back speaker, 2D+PL IIx
MOVIE is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals,
and DTS+Neo:6 is displayed when playing DTS 5.1-
channel signals.
Sound
source
Original sound
preserved with no
loss of clarity
When not using a surround back speaker, DOLBY
DIGITAL is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals.
Subwoofer
4
Use the volume control to adjust the volume level.
• Rhythms with crystal-like clarity
• Bass sound with no loss of depth
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is
coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound
1
Better sound using Phase Control
reproduction through the use of phase matching for an
optimal sound image at your listening position. The
default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase
Control switched on for all sound sources.
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase
correction measures to make sure your sound source
arrives at the listening position in phase, preventing
unwanted distortion and/or coloring of the sound (see
illustration below).
THX
STATUS
PHASE
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
MEM
During multichannel playback, LFE (Low-Frequency
Effects) signals as well as low-frequency signals in each
channel are assigned to the subwoofer or other the
subwoofer and the most appropriate speaker. At least in
theory, however, this type of processing involves a group
delay that varies with frequency, resulting in phase
distortion where the low-frequency sound is delayed or
muffled by the conflict with other channels. With the
Phase Control mode switched on, this receiver can
reproduce powerful bass sound without deteriorating the
quality of the original sound (see illustration below).
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
RECEIVER
•
Press RECEIVER, then press PHASE (PHASE
CONTROL) to switch on phase correction.
The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.
Phase Control OFF
Front speaker
Listening
position
Sound
source
Sound muffled due
to a delay in time
Subwoofer
• Rhythms blurred and difficult to hear
• Bass sound with loss of depth
• Sound of musical instruments with no reality
Note
1 • Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough together,
resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough (as shown in the upper section of the diagram
above), then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.
• The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in.
• If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set
to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the
orientation or the place of your subwoofer.
• Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to OFF. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher value.
• If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.
• The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 73.
12
En
Connecting your equipment
03
Chapter 3:
Connecting your equipment
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This page explains the
kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.
Rear panel
OR
NENT VIDEO
IN
MONITOR
OUT
HDMI
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
1
2
5
9
12 14 1
5
2
IN
3
18
XIAL
1
-
2
ASSIGNABLE
Y
VIDEO
IN
1
(DVD)
PB
FM UNBAL 75
AM LOOP
RS-232C
IN
2
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
PR
DVD
TV SAT
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
OUT
S ZONE 2
1
-
3
BD IN
13
AUDIO
IN
PRE OUT
(Single)
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
CENTER
3
IN
16
17
6
L
OAL
1
(T)
OUT
4
IN
IN
1
R
IN
2
SUBWOOFER
(DVR1)
CD
CD-R
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
7
2
ERS
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK /
B
IN
11
L
R
L
R
L
ASSIGNABLE
10
2
MULTI CH IN
(Single)
1
-
2
ASSIGN-
ABLE
OUT
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
1
-
2
OUT
1
8
L
12 VTRIGGER
2
(
OUTPUT
12 V
50 mA MAX
DIGITAL
TOTAL
)
R
SUBWOOFER
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI
5
RS-232C connector
Caution
Use for connection to a PC for graphical output when
using Advanced MCACC.
• Before making or changing the connections, switch
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.
See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on
page 66.
6
Control input/output
1
HDMI connectors (x4)
Use to connect other Pioneer components so that you
can control all your equipment from a single IR remote
sensor.
See Operating other Pioneer components with this
receiver’s sensor on page 81.
Three inputs and one output for high-quality audio/video
connection to compatible HDMI devices.
See Connecting using HDMI on page 16.
2
Coaxial digital audio inputs (x2)
Use for digital audio sources, including DVD players/
recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players, etc.
7
Remote input/output (MULTI-ZONE)
Use for connection to an external remote control sensor
for use in a MULTI-ZONE setup, for example.
See Connecting an IR receiver on page 63.
See also The Input Setup menu on page 69 to assign
the inputs.
3
XM Radio input
See Using XM Radio on page 55.
8
12 V trigger jacks (total 50 mA max.) (x2)
Use to switch components in your system on and off
according to the input function of the receiver.
See Switching components on and off using the 12
volt trigger on page 64.
4
Optical digital audio output/input(s) (x3)
Use the OUT jack for recording to a CD or MiniDisc
recorder.
See Connecting digital audio sources on page 19.
Use the IN jacks for digital audio sources, including DVD
9
Audio/video source inputs/(outputs) (x6)
Use for connection to audio/visual sources, such as DVD
players/recorders, VCRs, etc. Each set of inputs has jacks
for composite video, S-Video and stereo analog audio.
See Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other
video sources on page 18.
players/recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players,
etc.
See also The Input Setup menu on page 69 to assign
the inputs.
13
En
Connecting your equipment
03
10 Multichannel analog audio inputs
7.1 channel inputs for connection to a DVD player with
multichannel analog outputs.
See Using XM Radio on page 55.
11 Speaker terminals
Use for connection to the main front, center, surround
and surround back speakers.
See Installing your speaker system on page 21.
12 Composite and S-Video monitor outputs
Use to connect monitors and TVs.
See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 17.
13 SIRIUS Radio input
See Using SIRIUS Radio on page 57.
14 ZONE 2 audio/video outputs
Use to connect a second receiver in a separate room.
See MULTI-ZONE listening on page 61.
15 Component video connections (x4)
Use the inputs to connect any video source that has
component video output, such as a DVD recorder. Use
the output for connection to a monitor or TV.
See Using the component video jacks on page 19.
16 Stereo analog audio source inputs/(outputs) (x3)
Use for connection to audio sources such as CD players,
tape decks, turntables, etc.
See Connecting analog audio sources on page 20.
17 Multichannel pre-amplifier outputs
Use to connect separate amplifiers for front, center,
surround, surround back and subwoofer channels.
See Connecting additional amplifiers on page 61 (see
also Installing your speaker system on page 21 for
powered subwoofer connection).
18 AM and FM antenna terminals
Use to connect indoor or outdoor antennas for radio
broadcasts.
See Connecting antennas on page 23.
14
En
Connecting your equipment
When making cable connections
03
About the video converter
• To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables over the
top of the receiver.
The video converter ensures that all video sources are
output through all of the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks.
The only exception is HDMI: since this resolution cannot
be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to
the receiver’s HDMI video outputs when connecting this
1
video source.
If several video components are assigned to the same
input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 69),
the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, S-
Video, then composite (in that order).
• When connecting optical cables, be careful when
inserting the plug not to damage the shutter
protecting the optical socket.
Terminal for connection
with source device
Terminal for connection
with TV monitor
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
Y
Y
• When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable
may be damaged if bent around sharp corners.
PB
PB
PR
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
S-VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
Video signals can be output
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends
switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the
Video options on page 74) OFF.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and
other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology
must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Note
1 • If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat panel TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some
components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video
options on page 74) OFF.
• The ZONE 2 video input can also be converted. For details, see Setting the Video options on page 74.
15
En
Connecting your equipment
Connecting using HDMI
03
2
Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT
interconnect on this receiver to an HDMI interconnect
on an HDMI-compatible monitor.
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped
component, you can connect it to this receiver using a
• The arrow on the cable connector body should be
facing left for correct alignment with the connector
on the player.
1
commercially available HDMI cable.
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the
connected component is compatible with, including
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see below for
limitations), Video CD/Super VCD, CD and MP3. See
About the video converter on page 15 for more on HDMI
compatibility.
3
Use the INPUT SELECT button to select the HDMI
input you’ve connected to (for example, HDMI 2).
You can also perform the same operation by using the
INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing
HDMI on the remote control repeatedly.
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor or
flat panel TV
• Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options
on page 73 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI
audio output from your TV or flat panel TV (no sound
will be heard from this receiver).
HDMI IN
• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat
panel TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your
component or display. Note that some components
(such as video game units) have resolutions that may
not be converted. In this case, use an analog video
connection.
S-
HDMI
VIDEO IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
COAXIAL
1
-
2
ASSIGNABLE
VIDEO
OUT
IN
1
(DVD)
RS-232C
IN
2
(CD)
DVD
TV SAT
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR
OUT
• You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s
digital out jacks.
BD IN
AUDIO
IN
IN
XM IN
CON- IN
TROL
L
OPTICAL
IN
1
OUT
IN
IN
1
(TV SAT)
R
IN
2
IR
ZONE2
IN
(DVR1)
About HDMI
SPEA
ASSIGNABLE
1
2
A
-
2
MULTI CH IN
ASSIGN-
ABLE
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports
both video and audio on a single digital connection for
use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV
devices. HDMI was developed to provide the
technologies of High Bandwidth Digital Content
Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface
(DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital
content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant
displays.
OUT
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
1
-
2
OUT
1
L
12 VTRIGGER
2
(
12
OUTPUT
TOTAL
DIGITAL
V
R
50 mA MAX
)
SUBWOOFER
VSX-01TXH
HDMI/DVI-equipped component
HDMI OUT
HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced,
or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel
surround-sound audio. HDMI features include
uncompressed digital video, one connector (instead of
several cables and connectors), and communication
between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.
1
Use an HDMI cable to connect one of the HDMI IN
interconnects on this receiver to an HDMI output on
your HDMI component.
The HDMI indicator lights on the front panel when an
HDMI-equipped component is connected.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
Note
1 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection
(HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support
audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.
• If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some components
that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.
• Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.
• This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure
that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.
16
En
Connecting your equipment
03
3
Connect a coaxial-type1 digital audio output on
your DVD player to the COAXIAL IN 1 DVD) input.
Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio.
(
Connecting your TV and DVD player
4
Connect the stereo audio outputs on your DVD
player to the DVD AUDIO inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable.
VIDEO S-VIDEO
IN
IN
• If your DVD player has multichannel analog outputs,
you can connect these instead. See also Using XM
Radio on page 55.
TV
1
VSX-01TXH
S-
MONITOR
OUT
HDMI
OU
VIDEO IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
1
-
2
EO
OUT
IN
1
(DVD)
RS-232C
Connecting your Blu-ray disc player
DVD
TV SAT
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
OUT
SIRIUS ZON
BD IN
AUDIO
IN
IN
IN
IN
OU
XM IN
CON- IN
TROL
VSX-01TXH
L
OPTICAL
IN
1
OUT
IN
IN
1
(TV SAT)
S-
MONITOR
OUT
HDMI
OU
VIDEO IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
R
COAXIAL
IN
2
1
-
2
ASSIGNABLE
IR
ZONE2
(DVR1)
SPEAKERS
FRONT
IN
VIDEO
R
BLE
OUT
IN
1
2
A
2
MULTI CH IN
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(DVD)
ASSI
AB
OUT
RS-232C
FRONT
OUT
2
IN
(CD)
1
DVD
TV SAT
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
OUT
SIRIUS ZON
L
BD IN
12 VTRIGGER
2
AUDIO
IN
IN
IN
IN
OU
XM IN
CON- IN
TROL
(
12
50 mA MAX
OUTPUT
TOTAL
DIGITAL
V
L
OPTICAL
R
)
IN
1
OUT
SUBWOOFER
IN
IN
1
(TV SAT)
R
IN
2
IR
ZONE2
IN
(DVR1)
SPEAKERS
FRONT
R
ASSIGNABLE
2
A
MULTI CH IN
1
-
2
ASSIGN-
ABLE
OUT
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
1
-
2
OUT
1
L
12 VTRIGGER
2
(
12
50 mA MAX
OUTPUT
V
DIGITAL
TOTAL
)
R
SUBWOOFER
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
S-VIDEO
R
AUDIO
L
DIGITAL OUT
VIDEO OUT
ANALOG OUT
3
2
4
HDMI OUT
Blu-ray disc player
The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together
with a Blu-ray disc player, with HDMI connections. If your
Blu-ray disc player offers multi-channel analog audio
outputs, see Using XM Radio on page 55.
DVD player
The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together
with a TV and DVD player, with S-Video or composite
video connections. Different TVs and DVD players may
offer alternative connections. See also Using the
component video jacks on page 19 if your TV and/or DVD
player has component video inputs/outputs. If your DVD
player offers multichannel analog audio outputs, see
Using XM Radio on page 55.
•
Connect an HDMI output on your Blu-ray disc
player to the BD HDMI input.
Connect using an HDMI cable.
1
Connect the MONITOR OUT video jack to a video
input on your TV.
Use a standard RCA/phono jack video cable to connect to
the composite video jack, or for higher quality video, use
an S-Video cable to connect to the S-Video jack.
2
Connect a composite or S-Video output on your
DVD player to the DVD VIDEO or DVD S-VIDEO input.
Connect using a standard video cable or an S-Video
cable.
Note
1 If your DVD player only has an optical digital output, you can connect it to one of the optical inputs on this receiver using an optical cable. When you set
up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 69).
17
En
Connecting your equipment
03
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or
other set-top box
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR
and other video sources
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV
tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and
outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video
devices, including DVD/HDD recorders and VCRs.
VSX-01TXH
VSX-01TXH
S-
MONITOR
OUT
HDMI
OU
VIDEO IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
1
-
2
S-
MONITOR
OUT
HDMI
OU
VIDEO IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
VIDEO
OUT
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
1
-
2
(DVD)
RS-232C
VIDEO
OUT
IN
1
IN
2
(CD)
(DVD)
DVD
TV SAT
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
OUT
SIRIUS ZON
RS-232C
BD IN
AUDIO
IN
IN
2
IN
IN
IN
OU
XM IN
N- IN
OL
(CD)
D
SAT
IN
DVR1
OUT
D
OUT
SIRIUS ZON
BD IN
L
OPTICAL
AUDIO
IN
IN
1
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OU
X
CON- IN
TROL
IN
IN
1
(TV SAT)
L
L
R
N
1
OUT
IR
ZONE2
IN
IN
IN
1
(TV SAT)
SPEAKERS
FRONT
R
R
ASSIGNABLE
1
IN
2
2
A
-
2
MULTI CH IN
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
IR
ZONE2
IN
(DVR1)
ASSIGN-
ABLE
OUT
PEAKERS
FRONT
FRONT
E
R
2
1
-
2
OUT
MULTI CH IN
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
1
ASSIGN-
ABLE
OUT
L
FRONT
12 VTRIGGER
2
1
-
2
T
1
(
12
50 mA MAX
OUTPUT
TOTAL
L
DIGITAL
V
R
12 VTRIGGER
2
)
SUBWOOFER
(
12
OUTPUT
TOTAL
DIGITAL
V
R
50 mA MAX
)
SUBWOOFER
DIGITAL OUT
R
AUDIO
L
VIDEO S-VIDEO
AV OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT
R AUDIO L
VIDEO S-VIDEO
R AUDIO L
VIDEO S-VIDEO
AV OUT
AV IN
3
1
2
STB
1
Connect the audio/video outputs on the set-top
box to the TV SAT AUDIO and VIDEO inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable and a
video or S-Video cable.
DVR, VCR, etc.
1
Connect the audio/video outputs of the video
player/recorder to the DVR1 AUDIO and VIDEO inputs.
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio
connection and a video or S-Video cable for the video
connection.
2
Connect an optical-type1 digital audio output from
your set-top box to the OPTICAL IN 1
TV SAT) input.2
(
Use an optical cable for the connection.
• For a second recorder, use the DVR2 IN inputs.
2
If the device can record, connect the DVR1 AUDIO
and VIDEO outputs to the recorder’s audio/video
inputs.
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio
connection and a video or S-Video cable for the video
connection.
• For a second recorder, use the DVR2 OUT outputs.
Note
1 If your set-top box only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 69).
2 If your satellite/cable receiver doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.
18
En
Connecting your equipment
03
3
If the device can output digital audio, connect an
1
Connect the component video outputs of your
optical-type1 digital audio output from the recorder to
source to a set of ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
inputs.
Connect using a three-way component video cable.
the OPTICAL IN 2
(DVR1) input.
2
Use an optical cable for the connection.
• Since they are assignable, it doesn’t matter which
component video inputs you use for which source.
After connecting everything, you’ll need to assign the
component video inputs—see The Input Setup menu
on page 69.
Using the component video jacks
Component video should give superior picture quality
when compared to composite or S-Video. You can also
take advantage of progressive scan video (if your source
and TV are both compatible), which delivers a very stable,
flicker-free picture. See the manuals that came with your
TV and source component to check whether they are
compatible with progressive-scan video.
2
Connect the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
jacks to the component video inputs on your TV or
monitor.
Use a three-way component video cable.
Connecting digital audio sources
Y
This receiver has both digital inputs and outputs,
allowing you to connect digital audio components for
playback and for making digital recordings.
P
B
R
P
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Most digital components also have analog connections.
See Connecting analog audio sources on page 20 if you
want to connect these too.
2
TV
MONITOR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN
MONITOR
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
1
2
IN
3
Y
VSX-01TXH
PB
AM LOOP
S-
MO
HDMI
E
PR
VIDEO IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
OUT
SIRI2
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
1
-
2
PRE OUT
(Single)
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT
VIDEO
OUT
IN
1
(DVD)
RS-232C
IN
2
(CD)
DVD
TV SAT
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
OUT
S
SUBWOOFER
CD
CD-R
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
BD IN
AUDIO
IN
TI CH IN
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK /
B
IN
IN
R
L
R
L
R
L
XM IN
A
CON- IN
TROL
(Single)
L
OPTICAL
IN
1
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
OUT
IN
IN
1
(TV SAT)
R
IN
2
IR
(DVR1)
2
SPEAKERS
F
ASSIGNABLE
1
R
2
A
-
2
MULTI CH IN
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
ASSIGN-
ABLE
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI
FRONT
1
-
2
OUT
1
L
12 VTRIGGER
2
VSX-01TXH
(
OUTPUT
DIGITAL
12
V
TOTAL
)
R
50 mA MAX
SUBWOOFER
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT
VIDEO
1
OPTICAL
OPTICAL COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
DVD player
DIGITAL IN
2
1
CD-R, MD,
DAT, etc.
Note
1 • In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback only).
• If your video component doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.
2 If your recorder only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable. When
you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 69).
19
En
Connecting your equipment
03
Connect a coaxial-type1 digital audio output on
•
Connect the analog audio outputs of the source
1
component to one of the AUDIO inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable.
your digital component to the COAXIAL IN 2 (CD)
input.
Use a coaxial cable for the connection.
• If you’re connecting a tape deck, MD recorder, etc.,
connect the analog audio outputs (OUT) to the
analog audio inputs on the recorder.
2
For recording equipment, connect the optical-type
DIGITAL output to a digital input on the recorder.
2
Use an optical cable to connect to the OPTICAL OUT.
Connecting a component to the front
panel inputs
About the WMA9 Pro decoder
This receiver has an on-board Windows Media™ Audio 9
3
The front panel inputs comprise a composite video jack
(VIDEO), stereo analog audio inputs (AUDIO L/R) and an
optical digital audio input (DIGITAL IN). You can use
these connections for any kind of audio/video
Professional (WMA9 Pro) decoder, so it is possible to
playback WMA9 Pro-encoded audio using a coaxial or
optical digital connection when connected to a WMA9
Pro-compatible player. However, the connected PC, DVD
player, set-top box, etc. must be able to output WMA9 Pro
format audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital
output.
component, but they are especially convenient for
portable equipment such as camcorders, video games
and portable audio/video equipment.
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the
front video connections.
Connecting analog audio sources
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
VIDEO
L
R
DIGITAL IN
SETUP MIC
This receiver features two stereo audio-only inputs. One
of these inputs (CD-R) has corresponding outputs for use
with audio recorders.
H
PUS
P
N
E
O
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO
Pod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
VIDEO
L
R
DIGITAL IN
PHONES
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ST
–
ST
+
MONITOR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN
MONITOR
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
1
2
IN
3
Y
PB
FM UNBAL 75
AM LOOP
ASSIGNABLE
PR
DVR1
DVR2
OUT
SIRIUS ZONE 2
1
-
3
(Single) PRE OUT
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT
CENTER
CD
CD-R
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
I CH IN
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK /
B
R
L
R
L
R
L
A
(Single)
VIDEO OUTPUT
DIGITAL OUT
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
TV game, video camera, etc.
• Select these inputs by pressing VIDEO or using
INPUT SELECT (remote) to select VIDEO.
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI
VSX-01TXH
OUT
PLAY
IN
REC
R
L
AUDIO IN/OUT
Tape deck, etc.
Note
1 • If your digital component only has an optical digital output, you can connect it to one of the optical inputs on this receiver using an optical cable. When
you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 69).
• The digital outputs from other components can be connected to any spare digital audio inputs on this receiver. You can assign them when setting up
the receiver (see also The Input Setup menu on page 69).
2 In order to record some digital sources, you must make analog connections as explained in Connecting analog audio sources below.
3 • Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be downsampled to 48 kHz.
20
En
Connecting your equipment
03
Installing your speaker system
To take full advantage of the receiver’s surround sound capabilities connect front, center, surround and surround back
1
speakers, as well as a subwoofer. Although this is ideal, other configurations with fewer speakers—no subwoofer or
no center speaker, or even no surround speakers—will work. At the very least, front left and right speakers only are
necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just
one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal). You can use speakers
with a nominal impedance between 6 Ω and 16 Ω (please see Switching the speaker impedance on page 76 if you plan
to use speakers with an impedance of less than 8 Ω).
Front
right
Front
left
Subwoofer
Center
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
S-
MONITOR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN
MONITOR
OUT
HDMI
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
1
2
IN
3
COAXIAL
1
-
2
ASSIGNABLE
Y
VIDEO
IN
1
(DVD)
P
B
FM UNBAL 75
ASSIGNABLE
AM LOOP
RS-232C
IN
2
PR
(CD)
DVD
TV SAT
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
OUT
SIRIUS ZONE 2
IN
1
-
3
BD IN
AUDIO
IN
PRE OUT
(Single)
IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT
CENTER
XM IN
CON- IN
TROL
L
OPTICAL
IN
1
OUT
IN
IN
1
(TV SAT)
R
IN
2
IR
(DVR1)
CD
CD-R
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
ZONE2
IN
S
P
E
A
K
ERS
F
R
O
N
T
C
C
E
E
N
N
T
T
E
E
R
R
S
S
U
U
R
R
R
R
O
O
U
U
N
N
D
D
S
S
U
U
R
R
R
R
O
O
U
U
N
N
D
D
B
B
A
A
C
C
K
K
//
B
ASSIGNABLE
R
L
RR
LL
RR
L
2
A
1
-
2
(Single)
MULTI CH IN
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
ASSIGN-
ABLE
OUT
FRONT
1
-
2
OUT
1
L
12 VTRIGGER
2
(
12
50 mA MAX
OUTPUT
V
DIGITAL
TOTAL
)
R
SUBWOOFER
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI
VSX-01TXH
Surround
right
Surround
left
Surround
back left
Surround
back right
Connecting the speakers
Caution
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a
positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to
match these up with the terminals on the speakers
themselves.
• These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE
voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when
connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables,
disconnect the power cord before touching any
uninsulated parts.
• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted
together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal.
If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel
it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.
Note
1 When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single) terminals.
21
En
Connecting your equipment
03
• When placing speakers near the TV, we recommend
using magnetically shielded speakers to prevent
possible interference, such as discoloration of the
picture when the TV is switched on. If you do not have
magnetically shielded speakers and notice
discoloration of the TV picture, move the speakers
farther away from the TV.
Bare wire connections
Make sure that the speaker cable you’re going to use is
properly prepared with about 10 mm ( /8 in.) of insulator
stripped from each wire, and the exposed wire strands
3
twisted together (fig. A).
To connect a terminal, unscrew the terminal a few turns
until there is enough space to insert the exposed wire
(fig. B). Once the wire is in position, tighten the terminal
until the wire is firmly clamped (fig. C).
• If you’re using a center speaker, place the front
speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a
narrower angle.
fig. A
fig. B
fig. C
• Place the center speaker above or below the TV so
that the sound of the center channel is localized at
the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker
does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of
the front left and right speakers.
3
10 mm ( /8 in.)
• It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening
position. The angle depends on the size of the room.
Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
Banana plug connections
If you want to use speaker cables terminated with banana
plugs, screw the speaker terminal fully shut, then plug
the banana plug into the end of the speaker terminal.
• Surround and surround back speakers should be
positioned 60 cm to 90 cm (2 ft. to 3 ft.) higher than
your ears and titled slight downward. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the
speakers should be more directly behind the listener
than for home theater playback.
• Try not to place the surround speakers farther away
from the listening position than the front and center
speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound
effect.
Important
• To achieve the best possible surround sound, install
your speakers as shown below. Be sure all speakers
are installed securely to prevent accidents and
improve sound quality.
• Please refer to the manual that came with your
speakers for details on how to connect the other end
of the speaker cables to your speakers.
• Other connections on page 52 provides greater detail
on alternate speaker setups, such as using speaker
system B (page 59), bi-amping and bi-wiring
(page 60).
Front
right
Front
left
Center
Subwoofer
• If you are using a THX certified subwoofer use the
THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer
has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your
subwoofer.
Surround
right
Surround
left
Placing the speakers
Listening position
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect
on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines
should help you to get the best sound from your system.
Surround back left
Surround back right
• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the
other speakers should be at about ear-level when
you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the
floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very
high on a wall is not recommended.
Single surround back speaker
Caution
• Make sure that all speakers are securely installed.
This not only improves sound quality, but also
reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from
speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of
external shocks such as earthquakes.
• For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers
2 m to 3 m (6 ft. to 9 ft.) apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
22
En
Connecting your equipment
03
The diagrams below show suggested surround and
surround back speaker orientation. The first diagram (fig.
A) shows orientation with one surround back speaker (or
none) connected. The second (fig. B) shows orientation
with two surround back speakers connected.
Connecting antennas
Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna
as shown below. To improve reception and sound quality,
connect external antennas (see Connecting external
antennas on page 24).
90° to 120°
fig. a
fig. b
fig. c
RS
LS
RS
RS
LS
0° to 60°
LS
3
SBL
SBR
SBL SBR
SB
ANTENNA
fig. A
fig. B
5
FM UNBAL 75
• If you have two surround back speakers THX
AM LOOP
4
recommends placing them together and the same
distance from your listening position (see below).
1
2
THX speaker system setup
If you have a complete THX speaker system, follow the
diagram below to place your speakers. Note that the
surround speakers ( indicates bi-polar radiating
speakers) should output at an angle parallel to the
listener.
1
Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna
wires.
2
Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into
each terminal, then release the tabs to secure the AM
antenna wires.
L
C
R
3
Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached stand.
To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction
indicated by the arrow (fig. a), then clip the loop onto the
stand (fig. b).
• If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other
surface, secure the stand with screws (fig. c) before
clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the
reception is clear.
SL
SR
Surround
Surround
4
Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a
direction giving the best reception.
SBL
SBR
Surround back
5
Connect the FM wire antenna in the same way as
the AM loop antenna.
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a
wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.
• If you have two surround back speakers THX
recommends placing them together and the same
distance from your listening position for the following
THX modes: THX Select2 CINEMA, THX
MUSICMODE and THX GAMES MODE.
See also THX Audio Setting on page 50 to make the
settings that will give you the best sound experience
when using the Home THX modes (page 31).
23
En
Connecting your equipment
03
Connecting external antennas
To improve FM reception connect an external FM
antenna to the FM UNBAL 75 Ω terminal.
Plugging in the receiver
Only plug in after you have connected all your
components to this receiver, including the speakers.
Caution
• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull
out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the
power cord when your hands are wet, as this could
cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place
the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the
power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never
make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The
power cords should be routed so that they are not
likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can
cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the
power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged,
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent
service company for a replacement.
75 Ω coaxial cable
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75
AM LOOP
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m (16 ft. to
20 ft.) length of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP
terminals without disconnecting the supplied AM loop
antenna.
• The receiver should be disconnected by removing the
mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular
use, e.g., when on vacation.
For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally
outdoors.
• Make sure the blue STANDBY/ON light has gone
Outdoor antenna
out before unplugging.
•
Plug the power cord into a power outlet.
Indoor antenna
(vinyl-coated wire)
ANTENNA
5 m to 6 m
(16 ft. to 20 ft.)
FM UNBAL 75
AM LOOP
24
En
Controls and displays
04
Chapter 4:
Controls and displays
Front panel
1
2
3
4
5
VSX-01TXH
STANDBY/ON
PHASE
CONTROL
ADVANCED
MCACC
DIGITAL PRECISION
PROCESSING
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER
HDMI
DVD
BD
TV SAT
DVR 1/DVR
2
VIDEO
HDMI 1/HDMI
2
CD/CD-R
FM/AM
XM/SIRIUS
iPod USB
MULTI CH IN
INPUT
SELECTOR
MASTER
VOLUME
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
VIDEO
L
R
DIGITAL IN
PHONES
MULTI-ZONE
–
+
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ST
ST
10
11
6
7
8
9
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
PHONES
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL ON/OFF
–
+
SPEAKERS
ST
ST
12
INPUT SELECTOR dial
Use to select an input source.
13
14
1
DIGITAL VIDEO SCALER indicator – Lights when
Resolution is set to a setting other than PURE (for
example, when the video input signal is upscaled)
(page 73).
2
STANDBY/ON
Switches the receiver between on and standby. Power
indicator lights when the receiver is on.
HDMI indicator – Blinks when connecting an HDMI-
equipped component; lights when the component is
connected (page 67).
3
Remote sensor
Receives the signals from the remote control (see
Operating range of remote control unit on page 26).
5
6
MASTER VOLUME dial
Input source buttons
Press to select an input source.
4
PHASE CONTROL indicator – Lights when the Phase
Control is switched on (page 12).
ADVANCED MCACC indicator – Lights when one of
the MCACC presets (page 33) is selected.
7
VIDEO INPUT
1
See Connecting a component to the front panel inputs on
page 20.
DIGITAL PRECISION PROCESSING indicator –
Lights to indicate digital processing (for example, it
disappears when Pure Direct (page 33) is on, or when
listening through the multichannel analog inputs).
8
iPod DIRECT USB terminal
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio source
(page 52), or connect a USB audio device for playback
(page 54).
9
MCACC SETUP MIC jack
Use to connect the supplied microphone.
Note
1 The MCACC indicator does not light when the MCACC preset memory currently being selected has not been corrected with Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional or when EQ is set to OFF in the Audio parameter menu (see Setting the Audio options on page 73).
25
En
Controls and displays
04
10 PHONES jack
Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are
connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.
11 Listening mode buttons
AUTO SURR/STREAM DIRECT – Switches between
Auto surround mode (Auto playback on page 30) and
Stream Direct playback. Stream Direct playback
bypasses the bass/treble controls for the most
accurate reproduction of a source (page 33).
HOME THX – Press to select a Home THX listening
mode (page 31).
STANDARD SURROUND – Press for Standard
decoding and to switch between the various 2 Pro
Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 30).
ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch between
the various surround modes (page 31).
STEREO/A.L.C. – Switches between stereo playback,
Auto level control stereo mode and Front Stage
Surround Advance modes (page 32).
12 MULTI-ZONE controls
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTI-
ZONE listening on page 61), use these controls to control
the sub zone from the main zone (see Using the MULTI-
ZONE controls on page 62).
13 SPEAKERS
Use to change the speaker system (page 59).
14 ST +/–
Use to select preset radio stations (page 36).
Operating range of remote control unit
The remote control may not work properly if:
• There are obstacles between the remote control and
the receiver’s remote sensor.
• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the
remote sensor.
• The receiver is located near a device that is emitting
infrared rays.
• The receiver is operated simultaneously with another
infrared remote control unit.
ST
AN
DB
Y/
ON
30°
30°
7m (23 ft.)
26
En
Controls and displays
04
Display
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
PHASE CONTROL DNR
TUNED
2
DIGITAL
DTS
2HD
WMA9 Pro
AUTO
PCM
L
C
S
R
MULTI-ZONE DIALOG E ATT OVER STEREO
SL
SR
MONO
DSD PCM
SOUND
S.RTRV
V.SB
dB
HDMI
SBL SB SBR
LFE
DIGITAL
ANALOG
TV
DVD
BDP DVR
SIRIUS
iPod
VIDEO
HDMI
SR+
CD
CD-R
TUNER
USB XM
[ 1 ]
[ 2 ]
STREAM DIRECT
Neo : 6
THX ADV.SURROUND
STEREO
2
PRO LOGIC
STANDARD
AB
SP
SLEEP
13
14
15
16 17
18
19
1
SIGNAL indicators
10 SOUND
Light to indicate the currently selected input signal.
AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input
Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness or bass/treble
controls feature is selected (page 73).
signal automatically (page 33).
11 Master volume level
2
Program format indicators
12 SR+
These change according to which channels are active in
digital sources.
Lights when the SR+ mode is switched on (page 65).
13 STREAM DIRECT
L – Left front channel
Lights when Direct/Pure Direct is selected (page 33).
C – Center channel
R – Right front channel
SL – Left surround channel
14 Speaker indicators
Indicate the current speaker system,
A
and/or
B
(page 59).
S – Surround channel (mono)
SR – Right surround channel
15 Listening mode indicators
SBL – Left surround back channel
SB – Surround back channel (mono)
SBR – Right surround back channel
LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the ((( ))) indicators light when
an LFE signal is being input)
THX – Lights when a Home THX mode is selected.
ADV. SURROUND – Lights when an Advanced
Surround mode has been selected (page 31).
STEREO – Lights when the stereo mode is selected
(page 32).
3
Digital format indicators
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format
is detected (DSDPCM lights during the DSD (Direct
Stream Digital) to PCM conversion with SACDs).
STANDARD – Lights when a Standard Surround
mode is switched on (see Listening in surround
sound on page 30).
4
S.RTRV
16 SLEEP
Lights when the Sound Retriever is switched on
(page 73).
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 76).
17 Matrix decoding format indicators
5
MULTI-ZONE
2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2 Pro
Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page 30).
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 61).
6
PHASE CONTROL
Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the receiver
is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing
(page 30).
Lights when the Phase Control is switched on (page 12).
7
Sound processing indicators
Light according to the active Audio parameter(s)
(page 73) and/or ANALOG ATT (page 76).
18 Character display
Displays various system information.
8
V.SB
19 Input source indicators
Light to indicate the input source you have selected.
Lights during Virtual surround back processing (page 34)
.
9
TUNER indicators
TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.
STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is
being received in auto stereo mode.
MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using
the MPX button.
27
En
Controls and displays
Remote control
04
ENTER can be used to enter commands for TV or DTV,
and also to select a disc in a multi-CD player.
Press RECEIVER first to access:
12
13
INPUT SELECT – Use to select the input source.
DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 76).
RECEIVER
SOURCE
1
2
GENRE – Automatically selects the most appropriate
Advanced Surround mode for the genre of the source
currently being played back (this feature is available
only when a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI
Control is connected to this receiver via HDMI)
(page 35).
DVD
DVR 1
FM/AM
BD
DVR 2
XM
TV
CD
HDMI
CD-R
SIRIUS iPod USB
INPUT
SELECT
DIMMER
1
2
3
GENRE
MCACC
SLEEP
MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets
4
5
6
3
4
(page 33).
SR+
7
SBch
8
A.ATT
9
CLASS
SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and
select the amount of time before sleep (page 76).
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
ENTER
0
MASTER
VOLUME
INPUT
SR+ – Switches the SR+ mode on/off (page 65).
14
15
TV CONTROL
SBch – Use to select the surround/virtual back
channel mode (page 34).
CH
VOL
MUTE
AUDIO
PARAMETER
VIDEO
PARAMETER
A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an analog
input signal to prevent distortion (page 76).
EXIT
TUNE TOOLS
5
6
TOP MENU
ST
MENU
T.EDIT
CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel,
ENTER
ST
then use / to adjust the level (page 49).
CATEGORY
RETURN
Press FM/AM first to access:
SETUP TUNE
iPod CTRL
D.ACCESS – After pressing, you can access a radio
station directly using the number buttons (page 36).
AUTO/
STEREO/
BD MENU
DIRECT
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD
7
8
HDD
CLASS – Switches between the three banks (classes)
of radio station presets (page 36).
THX
STATUS
PHASE
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
MEM
4
TV CONTROL buttons
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to
the TV CTRL button. Thus if you only have one TV to hook
up to this system assign it to the TV CTRL input source
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV
CTRL button (see page 79 for more on this).
9
RECEIVER
10
16
17
11
MAIN
ZONE
2
TV – Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.
INPUT – Use to select the TV input signal.
CH +/– – Use to select channels.
RECEIVER
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according
to component control using the following system (press
the corresponding input source button to access):
VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your TV.
5
Tuner/component control buttons/SETUP
• White – Receiver controls (see below)
These button controls can be accessed after you have
selected the corresponding input source button (DVD,
DVR1, TV, etc.). The T.EDIT tuner controls are explained
from page 36.
• Blue – Other controls (page 80)
1
RECEIVER
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.
Press RECEIVER first to access:
2
Input source buttons
AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the Audio
options (page 73).
Press to select control of other components (see
Controlling the rest of your system on page 78).
VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the Video
options (page 74).
3
Number buttons and other receiver/component
controls
SETUP – Use to access the System Setup menu
(page 38).
Use the number buttons to directly select a radio
frequency (page 36) or the tracks on a CD, DVD, etc.
28
En
Controls and displays
04
RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current
menu screen (also use to return to the previous menu
with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV).
10 TV CTRL
Use this button to set preset code of your TV’s
manufacturer when controlling TV (see Selecting preset
codes directly on page 78 for more on this).
6
/// (TUNE/ST) /ENTER
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround
sound system (page 38) and the Audio or Video options
(page 73 or 74). Also used to control DVD menus/options
and for deck 1 of a double cassette deck player. Use the
TUNE / buttons to find radio frequencies and use ST
/ to find preset stations (page 36).
11 MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch
Switch to perform operations in the main zone and zone
2 (page 61).
12 Remote control LED
Lights when a command is sent from the remote control.
13 SOURCE
Press to turn on/off other components connected to the
receiver (see page 78 for more on this).
7
Receiver controls
Press RECEIVER first to access:
AUTO/DIRECT – Press to select Auto Surround
(page 30) or Stream Direct (page 33) listening.
14 MASTER VOLUME +/–
Use to set the listening volume.
STEREO/A.L.C. – Switches between the stereo
playback mode and the Front Stage Surround
Advance mode (page 32).
15 MUTE
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been
muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).
STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to
switch between the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and
Neo:6 options (page 30).
16 Remote control illumination button
Press to turn on/off the illumination of some of the
buttons. This function is convenient when operating in
dark rooms.
ADV SURR – Use to switch among the various
surround modes (page 31).
THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode
(page 31).
17 RECEIVER
Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to
select the white commands above the number buttons
(A.ATT, etc.)). Also use this button to set up surround
sound (page 10, page 38).
8
Component control buttons
The main buttons (, , etc.) are used to control a
component after you have selected it using the input
source buttons.
The controls above these buttons can be accessed after
you have selected the corresponding input source button
(for example DVD, DVR1 or TV). These buttons also
function as described below.
Press RECEIVER first to access:
STATUS – Press to check selected receiver settings
(page 76).
PHASE – Press to switch on/off Phase Control
(page 12).
SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 33).
Press TV first to access:
ANT – Use to select the VHF/UHF antennas or Cable
TV.
Press FM/AM first to access:
MPX – Switches between stereo and mono reception
of FM broadcasts. If the signal is weak then switching
to mono will improve the sound quality (page 36).
9
AUDIO – Changes the audio or channel on DVD
discs.
DISPLAY – Switches between named station presets
and radio frequencies (page 37).
CH +/– – Use to select channels for DVR units.
29
En
Listening to your system
05
Chapter 5:
Listening to your system
Important
Listening in surround sound
• The listening modes and many features described in
this section may not be available depending on the
current source, settings and status of the receiver.
See Listening modes with different input signal
formats on page 96 for more on this.
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in
surround sound. However, the options available will
depend on your speaker setup and the type of source
you’re listening to.
If you connected surround back speakers, see also Using
surround back channel processing on page 34.
Auto playback
Standard surround sound
There are many ways to listen back to sources using this
receiver, but for the simplest, most direct listening option
is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically
detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects
The following modes provide basic surround sound for
3
stereo and multichannel sources.
AUTO/
STEREO/
A.L.C.
BD MENU
STANDARD
ADV SURR
1
DIRECT
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.
HDD
DVD
THX
STATUS
PHASE
AUTO/
STEREO/
BD MENU
DIRECT
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
MEM
HDD
THX
STATUS
PHASE
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
MEM
RECEIVER
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
RECEIVER
•
While listening to a source, press RECEIVER, then
press STANDARD STANDARD SURROUND).
(
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.
•
While listening to a source, press RECEIVER, then
press AUTO/DIRECT AUTO SURR
STREAM DIRECT 2
for auto playback of a source.
(
/
)
• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround
encoded, the proper decoding format will
4
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before
showing the decoding or playback format. Check the
digital format indicators in the front panel display to see
how the source is being processed.
automatically be selected and shows in the display.
With two channel sources, you can select from:
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to movie sources
• When listening to XM Radio, the XM HD Surround
feature is selected automatically (see Using XM HD
Surround on page 56 for more on this), and also when
listening to the FM Radio, the Neural THX feature is
selected automatically (see Using Neural THX on
page 36 for more on this).
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
5
especially suited to music sources
• 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to video games
• 2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound
from the surround speakers is mono)
• Neo:6 CINEMA – 6.1 channel sound, especially
suited to movie sources
• Neo:6 MUSIC – 6.1 channel sound, especially suited
6
to music sources
Note
1 • Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using Neo:6 CINEMA or 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE (see Listening in surround sound above
for more on these decoding formats).
• The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones.
2 For more options using this button, see Using Stream Direct on page 33.
3 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers.
4 If surround back channel processing (page 34) is switched off, or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this happens automatically if the Surround
back speaker setting on page 41 is set to anything but Normal), 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).
5 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: C.WIDTH, DIMENSION, and
PANORAMA. See Setting the Audio options on page 73 to adjust them.
6 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the Audio options
on page 73).
30
En
Listening to your system
05
• Neural THX – Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially
• 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME+THX GAMES
1
suited to music sources
• THX SELECT2 GAMES
• XM HD Surround – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to music sources
With multichannel sources, press THX (HOME THX)
repeatedly to select from:
2
• THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 or 7.1
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
With multichannel sources, if you have connected
surround back speaker(s) and have selected SBch ON, you
can select (according to format):
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above (only available
when you’re using two surround back speakers)
• THX SELECT2 CINEMA – Allows you to hear 7.1
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See page 30
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC
• Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back channel
sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure
decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital
Surround EX)
• THX SELECT2 MUSIC – This mode is suited not only
for sources recorded in Dolby Digital and DTS, but
also to all multi-channel music sources (DVD-Audio,
etc.).
• DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback
with DTS-ES encoded sources
• THX SELECT2 GAMES – This mode is suited to
playing the sound of games.
• DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback
with DTS encoded sources
Using the Advanced surround effects
The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety
of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced
Surround modes are designed to be used with film
soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music
sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks
to see which you like.
Using the Home THX modes
THX and Home THX are technical standards created by
THX Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX
is designed to make home theater audio sound more like
what you hear in a cinema.
Different THX options will be available depending on the
source and the setting for surround back channel
processing (see Using surround back channel processing
on page 34 for more on this).
AUTO/
STEREO/
BD MENU
DIRECT
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD
HDD
THX
STATUS
PHASE
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
MEM
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
THX
STATUS
PHASE
RECEIVER
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
MEM
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
•
Press RECEIVER, then press ADV SURR
RECEIVER
(
ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to select a
listening mode.4
•
Press RECEIVER, then press THX
(HOME THX) to
• ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic
soundtracks
select a listening mode.3
With two channel sources, press THX repeatedly to select
a matrix-decoding process for the THX CINEMA mode
(see Listening in surround sound on page 30 for an
explanation of each process):
• DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog
• SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of
special effects
• MONOFILM – Creates surround sound from mono
soundtracks
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA
• 2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMA
• Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC
• Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
• ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources
5
• EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo field
• TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound for both
mono and stereo TV sources
Note
1 Neural THX can be selected when the input signal is an analog, PCM signal or FM input.
2 XM HD Surround can be selected only with the XM input.
3 If you only have one surround back speaker connected, THX SELECT2 GAMES is not available.
4 • Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back speakers in your setup. See Using
surround back channel processing on page 34 for more on this.
• If you press ADV SURR when the headphones are connected, the PHONES SURROUND mode will automatically be selected.
5 Use with Dolby Pro Logic for a stereo surround effect (stereo field is wider than Standard modes with Dolby Digital sources).
31
En
Listening to your system
05
• ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video games
• SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs
Using Front Stage Surround Advance
The Front Stage Surround Advance function allows you to
create natural surround sound effects using just the front
speakers and the subwoofer.
• CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound
• ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for rock
and/or pop music
• UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music sources
AUTO/
STEREO/
BD MENU
DIRECT
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD
HDD
• EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a stereo
THX
STATUS
PHASE
source, using all of your speakers
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
MEM
• PHONES SURROUND – When listening through
headphones, you can still get the effect of overall
surround.
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
RECEIVER
•
While listening to a source, press RECEIVER, then
Tip
press STEREO/A.L.C. to select Front Stage Surround
Advance modes.
• When an Advanced Surround listening mode is
selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the
EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on
page 73.
• STEREO – See Listening in stereo above for more on
this.
• A.L.C. – See Listening in stereo above for more on
this.
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich surround
sound effect directed to the center of where the front
left and right speakers sound projection area
converges.
Listening in stereo
When you select STEREO, you will hear the source
through just the front left and right speakers (and
possibly your subwoofer depending on your speaker
settings). Dolby Digital, DTS and WMA9 Pro
• F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround sound
1
multichannel sources are downmixed to stereo.
effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode.
In the Auto level control stereo mode (A.L.C.), this
receiver equalizes playback sound levels if each sound
level varies with the music source recorded in a portable
audio player.
FOCUS position
WIDE position
(Recommended)
Frontright
speaker
Front left
speaker
Frontright
speaker
Front left
speaker
AUTO/
STEREO/
BD MENU
DIRECT
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD
HDD
THX
STATUS
PHASE
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
MEM
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
RECEIVER
•
While listening to a source, press RECEIVER, then
press STEREO/A.L.C. for stereo playback.
Press repeatedly to switch between:
• STEREO – The audio is heard with your surround
settings and you can still use the Midnight,
Loudness, and bass/treble controls.
• A.L.C. – Listening in Auto level control stereo mode.
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – See Using Front Stage Surround
Advance below for more on this.
• F.S.SURR WIDE – See Using Front Stage Surround
Advance below for more on this.
Note
1 When using F.S.SURR WIDE, a better effect can be obtained if Auto MCACC Setup is performed. See Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto
MCACC) on page 10 for more on this.
32
En
Listening to your system
Using Stream Direct
05
Selecting MCACC presets
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary
signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the
pure analog or digital sound source (see Stream direct
with different input signal formats on page 101).
• Default setting: MEMORY 1
If you have calibrated your system for different listening
2
positions , you can switch between settings to suit the
kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting
(for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a
video game close to the TV).
AUTO/
STEREO/
BD MENU
DIRECT
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD
HDD
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
THX
STATUS
PHASE
MEM
INPUT
SELECT
DIMMER
3
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
1
2
MCACC
5
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
MEM
GENRE
SLEEP
RECEIVER
4
SR+
7
6
A.ATT
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
SBch
8
9
RECEIVER
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
CLASS
MAIN
ZONE
2
ENTER
0
1
While listening to a source, press RECEIVER, then
press AUTO/DIRECT AUTO SURR STREAM DIRECT) to
select the mode you want.
•
While listening to a source, press RECEIVER, then
(
/
press MCACC
.
3
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets
or to switch calibration off. See Data Management on
page 46 to check and manage your current settings.
Check the digital format indicators in the front panel
display to see how the source is being processed.
• AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 30.
• DIRECT – Sources are heard according to the
settings made in the Surround Setup (speaker
setting, channel level, speaker distance, acoustic
calibration EQ, and X-curve), as well as with dual
mono, the input attenuator, any sound delay and hi-
bit settings. You will hear sources according to the
number of channels in the signal.
Choosing the input signal
You need to hook up a component to both analog and
digital inputs on the receiver to select between input
4
signals.
THX
ANT
STATUS
PHASE
MPX SIGNAL SEL
MEM
• PURE DIRECT – Analog and PCM sources are heard
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
1
without any digital processing. No sound is output
RECEIVER
from the Second Zone in this mode.
•
Press RECEIVER, then press SIGNAL SEL to select
the input signal corresponding to the source
component.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
• AUTO – This is the default setting. The receiver
selects the first available signal in the following order:
HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.
• ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.
• DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.
Note
1 There are cases where a brief noise is heard before playback of sources other than PCM. Please select AUTO SURROUND or DIRECT if this is a problem.
2 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system. These presets
can be set in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 10 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 38, either of which you should
have already completed.
3 • These settings have no effect when headphones are connected.
• You can also press / to select the MCACC preset.
4 • This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96 kHz/24 bit) and WMA9 Pro digital signal formats. The
compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, WMA 9 Pro, PCM (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz sampling frequencies), Dolby
TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio, SACD and DVD Audio (including 192 kHz). With other digital signal formats, set to
ANALOG (the MULTI CH IN and FM/AM).
• You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital connections
(page 19) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.
• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.
33
En
Listening to your system
05
1
•
Press RECEIVER, then press SBch repeatedly to
• HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.
cycle the surround back channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
2
• PCM – Only PCM signals are output.
When set to DIGITAL or AUTO, 2 DIGITAL lights with
Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus decoding, 2 HD
lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding, DTS lights with DTS
or DTS-HD decoding, and WMA9 Pro lights to indicate
that a WMA9 Pro signal is being decoded.
• SBch ON – 6.1 or 7.1 decoding is always used (for
example, a surround back channel will be generated
for 5.1 encoded material)
• SBch AUTO – Automatically switches to 6.1 or 7.1
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example,
Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)
• SBch OFF – No sound is output from the surround
back speakers
Using surround back channel
processing
• Default setting: SBch ON
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode
When you’re not using surround back speakers,
You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1 or 7.1
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby
Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you can choose to always use
6.1 or 7.1 decoding (for example, with 5.1 encoded
material). With 5.1 encoded sources, a surround back
channel will be generated, but the material may sound
better in the 5.1 format for which it was originally
encoded (in which case, you can simply switch surround
back channel processing off).
selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround
back channel through your surround speakers. You can
choose to listen to sources with no surround back
channel information, or if the material sounds better in
the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally
encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect
3
to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.
The table indicates when you will hear the virtual
surround back channel (=Virtual surround back
channel is active).
The table below indicates when you will hear the
surround back channel when playing various kinds of
sources (=Sound plays through surround back
speaker(s)).
•
Press SBch repeatedly to cycle the virtual surround
back channel options.
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
1
GENRE
4
2
MCACC
5
3
SLEEP
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
MEM
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
6
A.ATT
• VirtualSB ON – Virtual Surround Back is always used
(for example, on 5.1 encoded material)
SR+
SBch
RECEIVER
7
8
9
CLASS
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
• VirtualSB AUTO – Virtual Surround Back is
automatically applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for
example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)
ENTER
0
MASTER
VOLUME
MAIN
ZONE
2
INPUT
• VirtualSB OFF – Virtual Surround Back mode is
switched off
Standard / THX
SBch
Processing /
Virtual SB
mode
Advanced
surround
Type of source
Stereo sources
Multichannel
sources
2
Pro Logic IIx 2 Pro Logic
Neo:6
Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES 5.1 ch
sources with 6.1 ch flagged
ON
AUTO
ON
Dolby Digital/DTS/SACD and DVD-
Audio 5.1 ch sources
c
AUTO
Note
1 When the HDMI option in Setting the Audio options on page 73 is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this receiver.
2 • This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.
• When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.
3 • You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the THX, stereo, Front Stage
Surround Advance, Auto level control stereo or Stream Direct mode is selected.
• You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to NO in the Speaker Setting on page 48.
• The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.
34
En
Listening to your system
05
Standard / THX
Stereo sources
SBch
Processing /
Virtual SB
mode
Advanced
surround
Type of source
Multichannel
sources
2
Pro Logic IIx 2 Pro Logic
Neo:6
a
Dolby Digital/DTS/PCM/SACD/WMA9
Pro and DVD-Audio stereo sources
ON
AUTO
ON
b
a
Analog 2-channel (stereo) sources
b
AUTO
ON
d
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/Dolby
Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/WMA9 Pro
encoded and PCM 6.1 ch/7.1 ch
sources
d
AUTO
d
Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/
WMA9 Pro encoded and PCM 5.1 ch
sources
ON
AUTO
ON
c
d
e
d
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/
DTS-EXPRESS encoded 5.1 ch
sources
e
d
AUTO
ON
a
d
Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD
encoded stereo sources
b
d
AUTO
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/
DTS-EXPRESS encoded stereo
sources
ON
AUTO
a.Only applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode.
b.Not applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode.
c.Sound is output from the surround back speakers only when THX SELECT2 CINEMA, THX SELECT2 MUSIC or THX SELECT2 GAMES is selected.
d.Advanced surround mode may not be available depending on the input signal.
e.Only applicable when two surround back speakers are connected. Also, depending on the input signal, it may happen that no sound is output from the
surround back speakers.
1
Press RECEIVER, then press GENRE while the source
assigned to a genre is being played back.
The most appropriate Advanced Surround mode for the
source being played back is automatically selected.
Using the genre synchronizing function
This feature automatically selects the most appropriate
Advanced Surround mode for the source currently being
played back on a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI
1
Control connected to this receiver via HDMI. For details
on HDMI Control, see About HDMI Control on page 68.
MEM
INPUT
SELECT
DIMMER
3
AUDIO
DISPLAY
CH
1
2
MCACC
5
GENRE
SLEEP
TV CTRL
RECEIVER
4
6
SR+
7
SBch
A.ATT
8
9
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
CLASS
MAIN
ZONE
2
ENTER
0
Note
1 • This feature is available only when the source being played back is assigned to a genre. When the source has no genre assigned to, NO GENRE appears
showing that this feature is not available.
• Make sure that HDMI Control is set to ON. When OFF is selected, CANNOT SELECT appears showing that this feature is not available (see Setting the
HDMI options on page 67).
35
En
Using the tuner
06
Chapter 6:
Using the tuner
See About Neural – THX Surround on page 94 for more on
this.
Listening to the radio
The Neural THX mode can be selected also with the
STANDARD button.
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and
AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the
frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a
station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can
memorize the frequency for recall later—see Saving
station presets below for more on how to do this.
Tuning directly to a station
Sometimes, you’ll already know the frequency of the
station you want to listen to. In this case, you can simply
enter the frequency directly using the number buttons on
the remote control.
AUTO/
STEREO/
BD MENU
FM/AM
XM
SIRIUS iPod USB
DIRECT
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD
AUDIO
VIDEO
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
HDD
EXIT
TUNE TOOLS
1
2
Press the FM/AM button to select the tuner.
INPUT
THX
STATUS
PHASE
SELECT
DIMMER
TOP MENU
ST
MENU
T.EDIT
1
2
3
SLEEP
Use the FM/AM button to change the band (FM or
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
MEM
GENRE
MCACC
ENTER
ST
AM), if necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.
4
SR+
7
5
SBch
8
6
A.ATT
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
CATEGORY
RETURN
9
CLASS
RECEIVER
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
SETUP TUNE
iPod CTRL
ENTER
3
Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).
0
MASTER
4
Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of
1
2
Press the FM/AM button to select the tuner.
Use the FM/AM button to change the band (FM or
the radio station.
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.
AM), if necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.
If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS
twice to cancel the frequency and start over.
3
Tune to a station.
There are three ways to do this:
Saving station presets
Automatic tuning
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s
convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for
easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station.
This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This
receiver can memorize up to 30 stations, stored in three
banks, or classes (A, B and C) of 10 stations each. When
saving an FM frequency, the MPX setting (see above) is
also stored.
To search for stations in the currently selected band,
press and hold TUNE / for about a second. The
receiver will start searching for the next station,
stopping when it has found one. Repeat to search for
other stations.
Manual tuning
To change the frequency one step at a time, press
TUNE /.
AUDIO
VIDEO
4
SR+
7
5
SBch
8
6
A.ATT
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
EXIT
TUNE TOOLS
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
MEM
High speed tuning
Press and hold TUNE / for high speed tuning.
Release the button at the frequency you want.
9
CLASS
TOP MENU
ST
MENU
T.EDIT
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
ENTER
0
ENTER
ST
MASTER
VOLUME
RECEIVER
INPUT
CATEGORY
RETURN
TV CONTROL
SETUP TUNE
Improving FM stereo sound
If the TUNED or STEREO indicators don’t light when
tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press
the MPX button to switch the receiver into mono
reception mode. This should improve the sound quality
and allow you to enjoy the broadcast.
1
Tune to a station you want to memorize.
See Listening to the radio above for more on this.
2
Press T.EDIT (Tuner Edit).
The display shows STATION MEMORY, then a blinking
memory class.
Using Neural THX
This feature uses Neural Surround™, THX technology to
achieve optimal surround sound from FM radio.
3
Press CLASS to select one of the three classes, then
®
press ST / to select the station preset you want.
You can also use the number buttons to select a station
preset.
• While listening to FM radio, press AUTO/DIRECT for
Neural THX listening.
36
En
Using the tuner
06
4
Press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop
blinking and the receiver stores the station.
Naming station presets
For easier identification, you can name your station
presets.
1
Choose the station preset you want to name.
See Listening to station presets below for how to do this.
2
Press T.EDIT (Tuner Edit).
The display shows STATION NAME, then a blinking
cursor at the first character position.
3
Input the name you want.
Choose from the following characters for a name up to
four characters long.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789
!”#$%&’()∗+,–./:;<=>?@[ \ ]^_{|} ˜ [space]
Use / to select a character, / to set the position,
and ENTER to confirm your selection.
Tip
• To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3
and input four spaces instead of a name.
• Once you have named a station preset, you can press
DISPLAY when listening to a station to switch the
display between name and frequency.
Listening to station presets
You will need to have some presets stored to do this. See
Saving station presets on page 36 if you haven’t done this
already.
1
Press FM/AM to select the tuner.
2
Press CLASS to select the class in which the station
is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.
3
Press ST / to select the station preset you
want.
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote
control to recall the station preset.
37
En
The System Setup menu
07
Chapter 7:
The System Setup menu
• Surround Back System – Specifies how you are
using your surround back speakers (see Surround
back speaker setting on page 41).
Making receiver settings from the
System Setup menu
• Manual MCACC – Fine tunes your speaker settings
and customize the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see
Manual MCACC setup on page 41).
The following section shows you how to make detailed
settings to specify how you’re using the receiver (for
example, if you want to set up two speaker systems in
separate rooms), and also explains how to fine-tune
individual speaker system settings to your liking.
• Data Management – Checks your MCACC presets
and manages them through copying, renaming or
deleting (see Data Management on page 46).
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
EXIT
TUNE TOOLS
MEM
• Manual SP Setup – Specifies the size, number,
distance and overall balance of the speakers you’ve
connected (see Manual speaker setup on page 48).
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AUDIO
DISPLAY
CH
TOP MENU
ST
MENU
T.EDIT
TV CTRL
RECEIVER
ENTER
ST
DVD
DVR 1
FM/AM
BD
DVR 2
XM
TV
CD
HDMI
CD-R
CATEGORY
RETURN
• Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve connected to
the digital, HDMI and component video inputs (see
The Input Setup menu on page 69).
SETUP TUNE
MAIN
ZONE
2
SIRIUS iPod USB
iPod CTRL
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
• Other Setup – Makes customized settings to reflect
how you are using the receiver (see The Other Setup
menu on page 70).
1
Use the RECEIVER button to switch on.
• If headphones are connected to the receiver,
disconnect them.
2
Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
the SETUP.2
If your setup requires more detailed settings than those
provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC) on page 10, you can customize your setup
options below. You can calibrate your system differently
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use /
// and ENTER to navigate through the screens
and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and
exit the current menu.
3
for up to six different MCACC presets , which are useful
• Press SETUP at any time to exit the System Setup
menu.
if you have different listening positions depending on the
type of source (for example, watching movies from a sofa,
3
Select the setting you want to adjust.
4
or playing a video game close to the TV).
System Setup MENU
1 . Auto MCACC
Important
2 . Surround Back System
3 . Manual MCACC
4 . Data Management
5 . Manual SP Setup
6 . Input Setup
• Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved
during the Auto MCACC Setup.
7 . Other Setup
:Exit
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any
5
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.
• Auto MCACC – See Automatically setting up for
surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 10 for a quick
and effective automatic surround setup. See
Automatic MCACC (Expert) below for a more detailed
setup.
• The screen saver will automatically appear after three
minutes of inactivity.
Caution
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are
output at high volume.
Note
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu.
2 • Note that when editing items in the Manual MCACC menu, you will need to first specify the MCACC preset you want to adjust by pressing MCACC
before pressing SETUP.
• You can’t use the System Setup menu when the iPod USB, XM or SIRIUS Radio input source is selected (in either the main or sub zone). When you
set ZONE 2 to ON (page 62), you can’t use the System Setup menu.
3 These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1–6 (or M1–6) until you rename them in Data Management on page 46.
4 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.
5 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the CUSTOM setup screen (step 2).
38
En
The System Setup menu
07
1
Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the System Setup menu,
• THX Speaker (only available when the Custom Menu
above is ALL or Speaker Setting) – Select YES if you
are using THX speakers (set all speakers to SMALL),
otherwise leave it set to NO.
then press ENTER
.
If the System Setup screen is not displayed, refer to
Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on
page 38.
• Stand.Wave Multi-Point (only available when the
Custom Menu above is EQ Pro. & S-Wave) – In
addition to measurements at the listening position,
you can use two more reference points for which test
tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is
useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration
System Setup MENU
1.Auto MCACC
1 . Auto MCACC
Surround Back System
2 . Surround Back System
3 . Manual MCACC
4 . Data Management
5 . Manual SP Setup
6 . Input Setup
[
Normal
]
Save SYMMETRY to
[
M1.MEMORY
1
]
7 . Other Setup
START
:Exit
8
ENTER:Start
:Cancel
for several seating positions in your listening area.
Place the microphone at the reference point
indicated on-screen and note the last microphone
placement will be at your main listening position:
2
Make sure ‘Normal’ is selected,1 select an MCACC
preset2, then select START 3
.
For a fully customized Auto MCACC setup, select
CUSTOM and set the following parameters using /:
4
3rd reference
point
2nd reference
point
1.Auto MCACC
1.Auto MCACC
1.Auto MCACC
1
2
Surround Back System
Custom Menu
SYMMETRY
M1.MEMORY
ALL CH ADJ
[
Normal
]
ALL
1
2
3
Save SYMMETRY to
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
[
M2.MEMORY
]
[
M1.MEMORY
CUSTOM
1
]
FRONT ALIGN
[
M3.MEMORY
]
]
EQ Pro.
&
S-Wave
THX Speaker
[
NO
3
[
START
]
:Cancel
:Return
ENTER:Next
ENTER:Next
ENTER:Start
:Return
Main listening
position
• Custom Menu – The default is ALL (recommended),
but you can limit the system calibration to only one
When you’re finished settings the options, press
RETURN to go back to the Auto MCACC main setup.
5
setting (to save time) if you want. The available
6
options are ALL, Keep SP System, Speaker
3
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC
Setting, Channel Level, Speaker Distance and EQ
Pro. & S-Wave.
jack on the front panel.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers
and the microphone.
• EQ Type (only available when the Custom Menu
above is EQ Pro. & S-Wave) – This determines how
the frequency balance is adjusted.
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
VIDEO
L
R
DIGITAL IN
PHONES
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ST
–
ST
+
After a single calibration is performed, each of the
following three correction curves can be stored
separately in the MCACC memory. SYMMETRY (default)
implements symmetric correction for each pair of left
and right speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude
characteristics. ALL CH ADJUST is a ‘flat’ setting where
all the speakers are set individually so no special
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position.
Otherwise, place the microphone at ear level using a
table or a chair.
4
Follow the instructions on-screen.
7
weighting is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN
• Make sure the microphone is connected.
sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker
settings (no equalization is applied to the front left and
right channels).
• If you’re using a subwoofer, it is automatically
detected every time you switch on the system. Make
sure it is on and the volume is turned up.
Note
1 If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back speaker setting
on page 41 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 3.
2 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can
rename it later in Data Management on page 46).
3 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select CUSTOM to save other correction curves (such as ALL CH ADJUST and
FRONT ALIGN).
4 Select DEMO, and then press ENTER to activate the demo mode of Auto MCACC. In the demo mode, no settings are saved and no errors occur. When
the speakers are connected to this receiver, the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test tone.
5 • The EQ Pro. & S-Wave measurement is also taken when ALL is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 44 for more on this.
• Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For details, see
Setting the Audio options on page 73.
6 The Keep SP System option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 48) unchanged.
7 If you selected ALL as your Custom Menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN settings.
8 Switch the Multi-Point setting NO if you only use one listening position.
39
En
The System Setup menu
07
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on
page 11 for notes regarding high background noise
levels and other possible interference.
7
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the
optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker
distance, and Acoustic Calibration EQ.
5
Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish
outputting test tones.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while
it’s doing this.
1.Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing
1.Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing
…
…
(6/9)
Subwoofer Check
Surround Analysis
Speaker System
Channel Level
[
[
[
OK
OK
]
]
]
Speaker Distance
• Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This
may result in incorrect speaker settings.
:Cancel
:Cancel
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient
noise! or Check Microphone) select RETRY after
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when
using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 11) and
verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to
be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and
continue.
• If you selected a Stand.Wave Multi-Point setup (in
step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd
and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at
your main listening position.
8
The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! Press RETURN
6
If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in
the OSD.1
to go back to the System Setup menu.
4a.MCACC Data Check
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the
actual speakers you have.
1 . Speaker Setting
2 . Channel Level
3 . Speaker Distance
4 . Standing Wave
5 . Acoustic Cal EQ
1.Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing
1.Auto MCACC
CHECK
…
(2/9)
Front
Center
Surr
SB
[
[
[
YES
YES
YES
]
]
]
]
]
:Return
ENTER:Next
Environment Check
Ambient Noise
Microphone
[
[
YES
YES
x
2
[
[
[
OK
]
]
]
SW
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the
Speaker YES/NO
OK
:Cancel
10: Next
:Cancel
2
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in
step 7.
System Setup menu (starting on page 38).
You can also choose to view the settings by selecting
individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check
screen:
• Speaker Setting – The size and number of speakers
you’ve connected (see page 48 for more on this)
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side
column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t
correct), there may be a problem with the speaker
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the
power and check the speaker connections. If there
doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use /
to select the speaker and / to change the setting
(and number for surround back) and continue.
• Channel Level – The overall balance of your speaker
system (see page 49 for more on this)
• Speaker Distance – The distance of your speakers
from the listening position (see page 50 for more on
3
this)
• Standing Wave – Filter settings to control lower
‘boomy’ frequencies (see page 43 for more on this)
• Acoustic Cal EQ – Adjustments to the frequency
balance of your speaker system based on the
acoustic characteristics of your room (see page 44
for more on this)
Note
1 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker Setting in Custom Menu from the Auto MCACC CUSTOM menu.
2 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will end up with different size
settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 48.
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and
room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
3 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers, there are cases where (for optimal surround
sound) the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting.
40
En
The System Setup menu
07
Press ENTER after you have finished checking each
screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back
to the System Setup menu.
Caution
• The test tones used in the System Setup are output at
high volume.
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver
upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup.
Important
• You will need to first specify the MCACC preset you
want to adjust by pressing MCACC before pressing
SETUP (step 2 in Making receiver settings from the
System Setup menu on page 38). When Manual
MCACC is selected while MCACC is set to OFF, the
selection screen for the MCACC memory appears.
Select a memory to adjust manually.
Surround back speaker setting
• Default setting: Normal
There are several ways you can use the surround back
speaker channels with this system. In addition to a
normal home theater setup where they are used for the
surround back speakers, they can be used for bi-amping
the front speakers or as an independent speaker system
in another room.
3.Manual MCACC
Select MCACC memory.
MCACC OFF
1
Select ‘Surround Back System’ from the System
M1.MEMORY
1
Setup menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
on page 38 if you’re not already at this screen.
:Cancel
ENTER:Next
• For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect
the setup microphone to the front panel and place it
about ear level at your normal listening position.
Press SETUP to display the System Setup menu
before you connect the microphone to this receiver. If
the microphone is connected while the System Setup
menu is not being displayed, the display will change
to the Auto MCACC setup menu. See Problems when
using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 11 for notes
regarding high background noise levels and other
possible interference.
System Setup MENU
2.Surround Back System
Normal
1 . Auto MCACC
2 . Surround Back System
3 . Manual MCACC
4 . Data Management
5 . Manual SP Setup
6 . Input Setup
Front
Center
Surr
:
:
:
:
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
SB
7 . Other Setup
:Exit
:Finish
2
Select the surround back speaker setting.
• Normal – Select for normal home theater use with
surround back speakers in your main (speaker
system A) setup.
• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up
the volume to the middle position.
• Speaker B – Select to use the (surround back) B
speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in
another room (see Speaker B setup on page 59).
1
Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the System Setup
• Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-
amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your front
speakers on page 60).
menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
on page 38 if you’re not already at this screen.
• ZONE 2 – Select to use the (surround back) B
speaker terminals for an independent system in
another zone (see MULTI-ZONE listening on page 61).
System Setup MENU
3.Manual MCACC
1 . Auto MCACC
a . Fine Channel Level
b . Fine SP Distance
c . Standing Wave
d . EQ Adjust
2 . Surround Back System
3 . Manual MCACC
4 . Data Management
5 . Manual SP Setup
6 . Input Setup
e . EQ Professional
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
7 . Other Setup
You will return to the System Setup menu.
:Exit
:Return
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to
make these settings in order.
Manual MCACC setup
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup
menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more
familiar with the system. Before making these settings,
you should have already completed Automatically setting
up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 10.
• Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments to the
overall balance of your speaker system (see Fine
Channel Level on page 42).
• Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay settings for
your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance on
page 42).
You only need to make these settings once (unless you
change the placement of your current speaker system or
add new speakers).
41
En
The System Setup menu
07
• Standing Wave – Control overly resonant low
frequencies in your listening room (see Standing
Wave on page 43).
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels
(+/–10dB) as necessary.
Use / to adjust the volume of the speaker you
selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds
like both tones are the same volume, press to confirm
and continue to the next channel.
The last two settings are specifically for customizing the
parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
on page 43:
• EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency balance
of your speaker system while listening to test tones
(see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 43).
3a.Fine Channel Level
R
L
L
R
C
+0.5dB
-1.5dB] SBL
+1.0dB] SBR [ +10.0dB]
-9.5dB] SW
[
[
[
[
-9.5dB]
SL
[
-1.5dB]
• EQ Professional – Calibrate your system based on
the direct sound coming from the speakers and make
detailed settings according to your room’s reverb
characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional on page 44).
SR [ +10.0dB]
:Finish
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will
change depending on which speaker you select.
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply
use / to select it.
Fine Channel Level
• Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
You can achieve better surround sound by properly
adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. The
following setting can help you make detailed
adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual
speaker setup on page 48.
Fine Speaker Distance
• Default setting: 10’00’’ (all speakers)
For proper sound depth and separation with your system,
it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some
speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening
position at the same time. You can adjust the distance of
each speaker in 1 inch increments. The following setting
can help you make detailed adjustments that you may
not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 48.
1
Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the Manual
MCACC setup menu.
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.
3.Manual MCACC
3a.Fine Channel Level
a . Fine Channel Level
b . Fine SP Distance
c . Standing Wave
d . EQ Adjust
Please wait...
CAUTION
20
e . EQ Professional
1
Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC
Loud test tones will
be output.
setup menu.
:Return
:Cancel
3.Manual MCACC
3b.Fine SP Distance
2
Adjust the level of the left channel.
a . Fine Channel Level
b . Fine SP Distance
c . Standing Wave
d . EQ Adjust
MCACC
:
M1.MEMORY
1
This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want
to keep the level around 0.0dB so that you’ll have plenty
of room to adjust the other speaker levels.
Ref.Ch
:
'
L
00 "
10
e . EQ Professional
:Return
ENTER:Next
:Cancel
3a.Fine Channel Level
MCACC
:
M1.MEMORY
1
2
Adjust the distance of the left channel from the
Ref.Ch
:
L
listening position.
+0.5dB
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance
ENTER:Next
:Cancel
as necessary.
Use / to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected
to match the reference speaker. The delay is measured in
terms of speaker distance from 0’01’’ to 45’00’’.
• After pressing ENTER, test tones will be output.
3b.Fine SP Distance
SL
3b.Fine SP Distance
SBL SL
6 ' 02 "
L
L
R
10
'
'
'
'
'
10 "
11 "
10 "
08 "
09 "
SBL
SBR
SW
[
[
9
10
9
]
]
[
[
6 ' 03 "
12 ' 01 "
]
]
C
SL
SR
[
9
]
:Finish
:Finish
42
En
The System Setup menu
07
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the
target channel. From the listening position, face the two
speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each
speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are
arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of
2
Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave
Control.
• Filter Ch – Select the channel to which you will apply
the filter(s): MAIN (all except center channel and
subwoofer), Center or SW (subwoofer).
1
you and between your arm span.
• TRIM (only available when Filter Ch above is SW) –
Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to compensate
for the difference in output post-filter).
• f / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where f
represents the frequency you will be targeting and Q
is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower the
bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation (ATT, the
amount of reduction to the targeted frequency).
When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up,
press to confirm and continue to the next channel.
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will
change depending on which speaker you select.
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply
use / to select it.
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
• Default setting: ON /0.0dB (all channels/bands)
2
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room equalizer
for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It works by
measuring the acoustic characteristics of your room and
neutralizing the ambient characteristics that can color the
original source material (providing a ‘flat’ equalization
setting). If you’re not satisfied with the adjustment provided
in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto
MCACC) on page 10 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on
page 38, you can also adjust these settings manually to get
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Standing Wave
2
• Default setting: ON /ATT 0.0dB (all filters)
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain
conditions, sound waves from your speaker system
resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the
walls in your listening area. This can have a negative
effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower
frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your
listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room,
it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The
Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of
overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During
playback of a source, you can customize the filters used
for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC
4
a frequency balance that suits your tastes.
1
Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup
menu.
3.Manual MCACC
a . Fine Channel Level
b . Fine SP Distance
c . Standing Wave
d . EQ Adjust
e . EQ Professional
3
presets.
:Return
1
Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC
2
Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your
setup menu.
liking.
3.Manual MCACC
3c.Standing Wave
MCACC M1. MEMORY
3d.EQ Adjust
a . Fine Channel Level
b . Fine SP Distance
c . Standing Wave
d . EQ Adjust
:
1
MCACC
Ch
:
M1
63Hz
125Hz
250Hz
500Hz
1kHz
[
[
[
[
0.0]
0.0]
0.0]
0.0]
0.0
Filter Ch
TRIM
SW
+12.0dB]
[SBL]
[
dB
e . EQ Professional
No.
f
Q
1
63Hz
3.0
2
3
[
[
]
]
]
[
[
[
110Hz
8.0
6.0dB
]
]
]
[
[
[
250Hz
5.0
6.0dB
]
]
]
2kHz
4kHz
8kHz
16kHz
[
[
[
[
0.0]
0.0]
0.0]
0.0]
ATT [ 2.5dB
:Return
:Finish
TRIM [ 0.0]
:Finish
Note
1 • If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.
• For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other speakers). Note that it may be difficult to
compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).
2 You can switch on or off the Standing Wave Control and Acoustic Cal EQ feature in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. See Setting the Audio options on
page 73 for more on this.
3 • Since they will be overwritten, you may want to save the standing wave settings made with the Auto MCACC Setup to another MCACC preset.
• Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.
• When Standing Wave is selected for a MCACC preset memory where S-WAVE is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER, S-WAVE ON is automatically
selected
.
4 When EQ Adjust is selected for a MCACC preset memory where EQ is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER, EQ ON is automatically selected.
43
En
The System Setup menu
07
Use / to select the channel.
How to interpret the graphical output
The graph shows decibels on the vertical axis and time (in
milliseconds) on the horizontal axis. A straight line
indicates a flat-response room (no reverb), whereas a
sloping line indicates the presence of reverberation when
outputting test tones. The sloping line will eventually
flatten out when the reverberant sound stabilizes (this
usually takes about 100 ms or so).
Use / to select the frequency and / to boost or
cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of
the screen and use / to select the next channel.
• The OVER! indicator shows in the display if the
frequency adjustment is too drastic and might
distort. If this happens, bring the level down until
OVER! disappears from the display.
By analyzing the graph, you should be able to see how
your room is responding to certain frequencies.
Tip
Differences in channel level and speaker distance are
taken into account automatically (compensation is
provided for comparison purposes), and the frequency
measurements can be examined both with and without
• Changing the frequency curve of one channel too
drastically will affect the overall balance. If the
speaker balance seems uneven, you can raise or
lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM
feature. Use / to select TRIM, then use / to
raise or lower the channel level for the current
speaker.
2
the equalization performed by this receiver.
Setting Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
according to your room characteristics
Using the manual setup, you can set the time period at
which the frequency response is analyzed, pinpointing
the time that is best for system calibration with your
particular room characteristics.
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
The graph below shows the difference between
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room
reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers. It
can also provide you with a graphical output of the
conventional acoustic calibration and professional
calibration (the gray circle indicates the point where the
microphone captures sound during frequency analysis).
1
frequency response of your room.
Level
Test tone
How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant
in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’), or that
different channels seem to exhibit different reverb
characteristics, select EQ Pro. & S-Wave (or ALL) for the
Custom Menu setting in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on
page 38 to calibrate the room automatically. This should
provide a balanced calibration that suits the
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
ConventionalMCACC
calibration range
EQ calibration range
Time
(in msec)
0
80
160
As soon as audio is output from your speaker system, it
is influenced by room characteristics, such as walls,
furniture, and the dimensions of the room. The sooner
the frequency analysis, the less it is influenced by the
room. We recommend an earlier time setting of
30~50ms to compensate for two major factors that will
influence the sound of most rooms:
characteristics of your listening room.
If you still aren’t satisfied with the results, the manual
Advanced EQ setup (below) provides a more customized
calibration of your system using the direct sound of the
speakers. This is done with the help of a graphical output
that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer
(with software available from Pioneer — see Connecting
a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 66).
Note
1 This system allows you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer
(with software available from Pioneer—see Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 66 for more on this).
2 Note that due to an effect known as ‘group delay’, lower frequencies will take longer to be generated than higher frequencies (this is most obvious when
comparing the frequencies at 0 ms). This initial slope is not a problem (i.e. excessive reverb) with your listening room.
44
En
The System Setup menu
07
• Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies –
Depending on your room, you may find that lower
frequencies seem overly reverberant compared to
higher frequencies (i.e. your room sounds ‘boomy’).
This may result in a skewed frequency analysis if the
measurement is done too late.
2
Select an option and press ENTER.
• Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the
reverb characteristics of your room (for graphical
output using a PC, see Connecting a PC for Advanced
MCACC output on page 66 to connect an RS-232C
cable before selecting this option).
• Reverb View – You can check the reverb
Low
Level
measurements made for specified frequency ranges
frequencies
1
High
frequencies
in each channel.
• Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time
period that will be used for frequency adjustment and
calibration, based on the reverb measurement of
your listening area. Note that customizing system
calibration using this setup will alter the settings you
made in Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC) on page 10 or Automatic MCACC
(Expert) on page 38 and is not necessary if you’re
satisfied with these settings.
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
ConventionalMCACC
calibration range
EQ calibration range
Time
(in msec)
0
80
160
• Reverb characteristics for different channels –
Reverb characteristics can be somewhat different for
each channel. Since this difference increases as the
sound is influenced by the various room
characteristics, it is often better to capture a
frequency analysis early on for smoother mixing of
channel frequencies/sounds.
3
If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ
ON or OFF, then START
.
3e.EQ Professional
3e1.Reverb Measurement
Left
surround
…
MCACC
:
M1.MEMORY
1
Now Analyzing
(2/5)
Level
Reverb Measure with
EQ OFF
Environment Check
Ambient Noise
Microphone
Right
surround
[
[
[
OK
]
]
]
[
START
]
Speaker Level
:Cancel
:Cancel
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
ConventionalMCACC
calibration range
EQ calibration range
The following options determine how the reverb
characteristics of your listening area are displayed in
Reverb View and Output PC (Data Management):
Time
(in msec)
0
80
160
If your room isn’t affected by the factors above, it is often
not necessary to make a 30~50ms setting. Later time
settings may provide a more detailed sound experience
with your speaker system. It is best to try and see what
works best for your particular room.
• EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of
your listening area without the equalization
performed by this receiver (before calibration).
• EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of
Note that changing the room (for example, moving
furniture or paintings) will affect the calibration results.
In such cases, you should recalibrate your system.
your listening area with the equalization performed
by this receiver (after calibration). Note that the EQ
response may not appear entirely flat due to
adjustments necessary for your listening area.
2
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select
Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 86
for troubleshooting information.
1
Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press ENTER.
3.Manual MCACC
3 e.EQ Professional
a . Fine Channel Level
b . Fine SP Distance
c . Standing Wave
d . EQ Adjust
1.Reverb Measurement
2.Reverb View
3.Advanced EQ Setup
e . EQ Professional
:Return
ENTER:Next
:Return
Note
1 If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 10 or Reverb Measurement
operation, depending on the standing wave control setting, differences may appear on the reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC function, the reverberations
are measured with the standing waves controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves
eliminated. By contrast, the Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without controlling the standing waves, so the graph indicates the
reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves. If you wish to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves
as such), we recommend using the Reverb Measurement function.
2 The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset, exit the
System Setup menu and press MCACC to select it before pressing SETUP.
45
En
The System Setup menu
07
4
If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the
reverb characteristics for each channel. Press RETURN
when you’re done.
Data Management
This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets,
allowing you to calibrate your system for different
listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the
3e2.Reverb View
M1
Ch
:
EQ OFF
L
Fq
[
125Hz ]
dB
1
same listening position). This is useful for alternate
settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to
and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies
from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).
0
80
160ms
:Return
This appears according to the setting you chose in
Reverb Measurement (step 3 on page 45). Use / to
select the channel and the frequency you want to check.
Use /to go back and forth between the two. Note that
the markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in 2 dB
steps.
From this menu you can check your current settings,
copy from one preset to another, name presets for easier
identification and clear any ones you don’t need.
1
Select ‘Data Management’ from the System Setup
menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
on page 38 if you’re not already at this screen.
5
If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, enter the
desired time setting for calibration. Press to proceed
to the next screen, and then select START
.
System Setup MENU
4.Data Management
1 . Auto MCACC
a . MCACC Data Check
b . Memory Rename
c . MCACC Memory Copy
d . MCACC Memory Clear
e . Output PC
2 . Surround Back System
3 . Manual MCACC
4 . Data Management
5 . Manual SP Setup
6 . Input Setup
Based on the reverb measurement above, you can
choose the time period that will be used for the final
frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you
can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is
best to use the measurement results as a reference for
your time setting. For an optimal system calibration
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we
recommend using the 30~50ms setting.
7 . Other Setup
:Exit
:Return
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.
• MCACC Data Check – Checks the settings for any of
your MCACC presets using the on-screen display
(see Checking MCACC preset data on page 47).
3e3.Adv. EQ Setup
(1/2)
3e3.Adv. EQ Setup
(2/2)
1
• Memory Rename – Names your MCACC presets for
easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets on
page 47).
Ch
L
L
Fq
Tm
[
[
125Hz ]
30-50ms ]
MCACC
:
M1.MEMORY
EQ Type
[
SYMMETRY
]
Stand Wave Multi
-
Point
YES
dB
[
]
Place the mic at your
2nd reference point.
[
START
]
0
80
160ms
• MCACC Memory Copy – Copies settings from one
MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC
preset data on page 47).
:Cancel
ENTER:Start
:Cancel
Use / to select the channel, frequency, and time
setting. Use / to switch between them.
You can switch between your connected speakers
(excluding the subwoofer), and display the
measurements for the following frequencies: 63Hz,
125Hz, 250Hz, 500Hz, 1kHz, 2kHz, 4kHz, 8kHz and
16kHz.
• MCACC Memory Clear – Clears any MCACC presets
that you don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets on
page 47).
• Output PC – See Connecting a PC for Advanced
MCACC output on page 66 for more on this.
Select the setting from the following time periods (in
milliseconds): 0~20ms, 10~30ms, 20~40ms, 30~50ms,
40~60ms, 50~70ms and 60~80ms. This setting will be
applied to all channels during calibration.
When you’re finished, select START. It will take about 2
to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are
given the option to check the settings on-screen.
Note
1 This can be done in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 10 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 38, either of which you
should have already completed.
46
En
The System Setup menu
07
Checking MCACC preset data
Copying MCACC preset data
After you have completed Automatically setting up for
surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 10 or Automatic
MCACC (Expert) on page 38, you can check your
calibrated settings using the on-screen display.
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration
EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 41), we
1
recommend copying your current settings to an unused
MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will
give you a reference point from which to start.
1
Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
1
Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
4.Data Management
4a.MCACC Data Check
a . MCACC Data Check
b . Memory Rename
c . MCACC Memory Copy
d . MCACC Memory Clear
e . Output PC
1 . Speaker Setting
2 . Channel Level
3 . Speaker Distance
4 . Standing Wave
5 . Acoustic Cal EQ
4.Data Management
4c.MCACC Memory Copy
Copy
a . MCACC Data Check
b . Memory Rename
c . MCACC Memory Copy
d . MCACC Memory Clear
e . Output PC
All Data
From
All Data
[
[
M1. MEMORY 1 ]
M2. MEMORY 2 ]
To
:Return
:Return
ENTER:Next
Start Copy
[ Cancel ]
:Cancel
:Return
2
3
Select the setting you want to check.
• It is useful to do this while a source is playing so you
can compare the different settings.
2
3
Select the setting you want to copy.
• All Data – Copies all the settings of the selected
MCACC preset memory.
Select the MCACC preset that you want to check.
Use / if necessary to switch speakers/settings.
• LEVEL & DISTANCE – Copies only the channel level
and speaker distance settings of the selected
MCACC preset memory.
4a5.EQ Data Check
MCACC
Ch
M1
[SBL]
63Hz
125Hz
250Hz
500Hz
1kHz
2kHz
4kHz
8kHz
16kHz
TRIM
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
dB
Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the
settings ‘From’, then specify where you want to copy
them (‘To’).
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re
currently using (this can’t be undone).
:Return
4
Press RETURN to go back to the Data Check menu,
4
Select ‘Copy’ to confirm and copy the settings.
repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings.
Completed! shows in the OSD to confirm the MCACC
preset has been copied, then you automatically return to
the Data Management setup menu.
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.
Renaming MCACC presets
Clearing MCACC presets
If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re
using, you may want to rename them for easier
identification.
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets
stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration
settings of that preset.
1
Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data
1
Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
Management setup menu.
4.Data Management
4b.Memory Rename
4.Data Management
4d.MCACC Memory Clear
a . MCACC Data Check
b . Memory Rename
c . MCACC Memory Copy
d . MCACC Memory Clear
e . Output PC
MCACC Position Rename
a . MCACC Data Check
b . Memory Rename
c . MCACC Memory Copy
d . MCACC Memory Clear
e . Output PC
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
MEMORY
MEMORY
MEMORY
MEMORY
MEMORY
MEMORY
1
2
3
4
5
6
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
Clear
M1. MEMORY
1
Start Clear
[ Cancel ]
:Cancel
:Return
:Finish
:Return
2
Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then
2
Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.
select an appropriate preset name.
Use / to select the preset, then / to select a
preset name.
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re
currently using (this can’t be undone).
3
Select ‘Clear’ to confirm and clear the preset.
3
Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary,
Completed! shows in the OSD to confirm the MCACC
preset has been cleared, then you automatically return to
the Data Management setup menu.
then press RETURN when you’re finished.
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.
Note
1 The settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 10 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 38.
47
En
The System Setup menu
Manual speaker setup
07
Speaker Setting
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration
(size, number of speakers and crossover frequency). It is
a good idea to make sure that the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to
optimize the surround sound performance. You only need
to make these settings once (unless you change the
placement of your current speaker system or add new
speakers).
1
MCACC) on page 10 are correct. Note that this setting
applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be set
independently.
These settings are designed to customize your system,
but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto
MCACC) on page 10, it isn’t necessary to make all of
these settings.
1
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
5.Manual SP Setup
5a.Speaker Setting
Front SMALL
Center [ SMALL ]
Surr
SB
a . Speaker Setting
b . Channel Level
c . Speaker Distance
d . X-Curve
[ SMALL ]
[ SMALLx2
[ YES
]
]
SW
Caution
e . THX Audio Setting
X. OVER
(THX:ALL SMALL
[
80Hz]
• The test tones used in the System Setup are output at
high volume.
)
:Return
:Return
2
Choose the set of speakers that you want to set,
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press ENTER.
then select a speaker size.
Use / to select the size (and number) of each of the
following speakers:
5.Manual SP Setup
System Setup MENU
1 . Auto MCACC
a . Speaker Setting
b . Channel Level
c . Speaker Distance
d . X-Curve
2
2 . Surround Back System
3 . Manual MCACC
4 . Data Management
5 . Manual SP Setup
6 . Input Setup
• Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you
didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send
the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.
e . THX Audio Setting
7 . Other Setup
:Return
:Exit
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.
• Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center
speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to
the front speakers).
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to
adjust these settings in order:
• Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and number of
speakers you’ve connected (see below).
• Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance of your
speaker system (page 49).
• Surr – Select LARGE if your surround speakers
reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect
surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the
surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a
subwoofer).
• Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance of your
speakers from the listening position (page 50).
• X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your speaker
system for movie soundtracks (page 50).
• THX Audio Setting – Specifies whether you are
using a THX speaker setup (page 50).
• SB – Select the number of surround back speakers
3
Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,
3
you have (one, two or none). Select LARGE if your
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.
surround back speakers reproduce bass frequencies
effectively. Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to
the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t
connect surround back speakers choose NO.
Note
1 If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL.
2 If you select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center and surround speakers can’t be set to LARGE
if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.
3 • If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.
• If you select one surround back speaker only, make sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround back terminal.
48
En
The System Setup menu
07
• SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels
set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when
YES is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want
the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or
you want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that
would normally come out the front and center
speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If you did
not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass
frequencies are output from other speakers).
2
3
Select a setup option.
• MANUAL – Move the test tone manually from
speaker to speaker and adjust individual channel
levels.
• AUTO – Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves
from speaker to speaker automatically.
1
Confirm your selected setup option.
The test tones will start after you press ENTER.
5b.Channel Level
3
Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.2
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
Please wait...
CAUTION
20
Loud test tones will
be output.
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
:Cancel
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
4
Adjust the level of each channel using /.
Channel Level
If you selected MANUAL, use / to switch speakers.
The AUTO setup will output test tones in the order shown
on-screen:
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the
overall balance of your speaker system, an important
factor when setting up a home theater system.
5b.Channel Level
MCACC
:
M1.MEMORY
1
Important
L
C
R
0.0 dB SR
0.0 dB ] SBR
0.0 dB ] SBL
SL
[
[
[
[
[
0.0 dB ]
0.0 dB ]
0.0 dB ]
0.0 dB ]
0.0 dB ]
[
[
• When Channel Level is selected while MCACC is set
to OFF, the selection screen for the MCACC memory
appears. Select a memory to adjust manually.
SW
:Finish
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is
5b.Channel Level
3
Select MCACC memory.
emitted.
MCACC OFF
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
M1.MEMORY
1
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
:Cancel
ENTER:Next
Tip
1
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
• You can change the channel levels at any time by
press RECEIVER, then press CH LEVEL, and then
using / on the remote control.
5.Manual SP Setup
6b.Channel Level
MCACC
Test Tone
:
M1.MEMORY
AUTO
1
a . Speaker Setting
b . Channel Level
c . Speaker Distance
d . X-Curve
+0.5dB
e . THX Audio Setting
:Return
ENTER:Next
:Cancel
Note
1 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This may not,
however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due
low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with
it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems,
the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers.
2 • This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing
back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.
• If you’re using a THX speaker setup, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.
3 • If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB
SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).
• The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual soundtrack.
49
En
The System Setup menu
07
1
2
Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
Speaker Distance
For good sound depth and separation from your system,
you need to specify the distance of your speakers from
the listening position. The receiver can then add the
proper delay needed for effective surround sound.
5.Manual SP Setup
5d.X-Curve
X-Curve
-2.0dB/oct
a . Speaker Setting
b . Channel Level
c . Speaker Distance
d . X-Curve
e . THX Audio Setting
:Return
:Finish
Important
• When Speaker Distance is selected while MCACC is
set to OFF, the selection screen for the MCACC
memory appears. Select a memory to adjust
manually.
Choose the X-Curve setting you want.
Use / to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed
as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at
2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope
increases (to a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the
following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your
room size:
5c.Speaker Distance
Select MCACC memory.
MCACC OFF
M1.MEMORY
1
2
≤400 ≤550 ≤650 ≤800 ≤2200 ≤12000
–1 –1.5 –2 –2.5 –3
Room size (ft )
ENTER:Next
:Cancel
X-Curve (dB/oct) –0.5
1
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP
• If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be flat and
the X-Curve has no effect.
Setup menu.
5.Manual SP Setup
3
Select ‘Return’, then press ENTER to finish.
a . Speaker Setting
b . Channel Level
c . Speaker Distance
d . X-Curve
THX Audio Setting
e . THX Audio Setting
When the THX Loudness Plus function is used, sound
can be played with the full surround effect even when the
volume is low.
:Return
2
Adjust the distance of each speaker using /.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 1 inch
increments.
For the most effective results when using the THX
SELECT2 Cinema, THX SELECT2 Music and THX
SELECT2 Games listening modes (see Using the Home
THX modes on page 31) with the Advanced Speaker Array
(ASA) system (see About THX on page 93), it is required
that you make the setting. See Placing the speakers on
5c.Speaker Distance
5c.Speaker Distance
MCACC
:
M1.MEMORY
1
MCACC
:
M1.MEMORY
1
SR
0 ' 11 ''
11 ' 09 ''
12 ' 05 ''
13 ' 10 ''
45 ' 00 ''
L
C
R
10 ' 00 ''
0 ' 11 ''
11 ' 09 ''
SBR
SBL
SL
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
[
[
]
]
2
page 22 for more on THX speaker placement.
SW
:Finish
:Finish
1
Select ‘THX Audio Setting’ from the Manual SP
Setup menu.
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
5.Manual SP Setup
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
a . Speaker Setting
b . Channel Level
c . Speaker Distance
d . X-Curve
Tip
e . THX Audio Setting
• For best surround sound, make sure the surround
back speakers are the same distance from the
listening position.
:Return
2
Select either ON or OFF for THX Loudness Plus
setting.
X-Curve
5e.THX Audio Setting
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright
when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting
acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater
listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie
Loudness Plus
SB SP Position
ON
0
-
1
ft
1
soundtracks.
:Finish
Note
1 Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t applied when you’re using any of the Home THX modes (see Using the Home THX modes on page 31).
2 If you don’t have surround back speakers, or have only one surround back speaker or select Speaker B, Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2 for Surround Back
System, you won’t be able to select this setting (Cannot select shows in the display).
50
En
The System Setup menu
07
3
Specify the distance of your surround back speakers
from each other.
5e.THX Audio Setting
Loudness Plus
SB SP Position
[
ON
]
0
-
1
ft
:Finish
• 0 – 1 ft – Surround speakers within 1 foot apart (best
for THX surround sound).
• > 1 – 4 ft – Surround speakers between 1 and 4 feet
apart.
• 4 ft < – Surround speakers more than 4 feet apart.
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN
.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
51
En
Other connections
08
Chapter 8:
Other connections
Connecting your iPod to the receiver
Set this receiver to the standby mode, and then use
the USB cable (for iPod connection)2 to connect your
iPod to the iPod DIRECT USB terminal on the front
panel of this receiver.
Caution
1
• Before making or changing the connections, switch off
the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in components should be the
last connection you make with your system.
For the cable connection, refer to also the operating
instructions for iPod.
• Do not allow any contact between speaker wires from
different terminals.
2
Switch the receiver on and press the iPod USB
input source button on the remote control to switch
the receiver to the iPod USB.
The front panel display shows Loading while the receiver
verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod.
Connecting an iPod
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow
you to control playback of audio content from your iPod
1
3
Press TOP MENU to display iPod Top menu.
using the controls of this receiver.
When the display shows Top Menu you’re ready to play
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the
iPod DIRECT USB terminal.
3
music from the iPod.
• If after pressing iPod the display shows No Device,
try switching off the receiver and reconnecting the
iPod to the receiver.
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
H
PUS
OPEN
MASTER
VOLUME
iPod playback
To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
VIDEO
L
R
DIGITAL IN
4
of the OSD of your TV connected to this receiver. You can
also control all operations for music in the front panel
display of this receiver.
Finding what you want to play
VSX-01TXH
When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can
browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist,
album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to
using your iPod directly.
USB cable
(for iPod connection)
iPod
MENU
ꢄ
ꢃ
iPod Top
[ Playlists
[ Artists
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
ꢁꢂ
[
Albums
[ Songs
[ Podcasts
[
Genres
[ Composers
[ Audiobooks
[ Shuffle Songs
Enter
Note
1 • This system is compatible with the audio of iPod nano, iPod fifth generation, iPod classic, iPod touch (not supported iPod shuffle and iPhone). However,
that some of the functions may be restricted for some models. Note, however, compatibility may vary depending on the software version of your iPod. Please
be sure to use the latest available software version.
• iPod is licensed for reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted to reproduce.
• Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.
• Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of recorded material
resulting from the iPod failure.
2 The USB cable (for iPod connection) is not included with this receiver.
3 • The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver.
• You can’t use the iPod USB, XM and SIRIUS radio functions simultaneously with using the MULTI-ZONE feature (page 61).
4 • Note that non-roman characters in the title are displayed as #.
• This feature is not available for photos or video clips on your iPod.
52
En
Other connections
08
1
Use / to select a category, then press ENTER to
Button
What it does
browse that category.
/
During Audiobook playback, press to switch the
playback speed: Faster Normal Slower
• To return to the previous level any time, press
RETURN.
TOP
MENU
Press to return to the iPod Top menu screen.
2
Use / to browse the selected category (e.g.,
albums).
RETURN
Press to return to the previous level.
• Use / to move to previous/next levels.
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you
Important
want to play, then press
Navigation through categories on your iPod looks like
this:
to start playback.1
If an error message lights in the display, try following the
points below:
Symptom What it means
Playlists Songs
Artists Albums Songs
Albums Songs
Songs
Podcasts
Genres Artists Albums Songs
Composers Albums Songs
Audiobooks
Error I1
There is a problem with the signal path from the
iPod to the receiver. Switch off the receiver and
reconnect the iPod to the receiver. If this doesn’t
seem to work, try resetting your iPod.
Error I2
The software version being used with the iPod
needs to be updated. Update the software being
used with the iPod (please use the latest iPod
software versions later than the iPod updater
2004-10-20).
Shuffle Songs
Tip
Error I3
Error I4
The iPod that is not supported is connected.
Check whether the iPod was supported by this
receiver (page 52).
• You can play all of the songs in a particular category
by selecting the All item at the top of each category
list. For example, you can play all the songs by a
particular artist.
When the iPod software version is too old. Update
the iPod software to the latest version.
When there is no response from the iPod. Update
the iPod software to the latest version. If this
doesn’t seem to work, try resetting your iPod.
Basic playback controls
The following table shows the basic playback controls for
your iPod. Press iPod USB to switch the remote control
to the iPod USB operation mode.
No Music There are no playable songs currently stored in the
Track
iPod. Input some music files compatible with iPod
playback.
Button
What it does
Press to start playback.
No Track
When there are no tracks in the category selected
on the iPod. Select a different category.
If you start playback when something other than a
song is selected, all the songs that fall into that
category will play.
2
Switching the iPod controls
You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod
and the receiver.
Pauses playback, or restarts playback when
paused.
/
Press and hold during playback to start scanning.
1
Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod controls.3
/ Press to skip to previous/next track.
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat One,
This enables operation and display on your iPod, and this
receiver’s remote control and OSD become inactive.
Repeat All and Repeat Off.
2
Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to the receiver
Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle Songs,
Shuffle Albums and Shuffle Off.
controls.
DISPLAY Press repeatedly to change the song playback
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
information displayed in the front panel display.
/
When browsing, press to move to previous/next
levels. During playback, press to skip to previous/
next track.
Note
1 If you’re in the song category, you can also press ENTER to start playback.
2 You cannot use this function, when an iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first generation is connected.
3 When this function is set, iPod images cannot be played on this receiver.
53
En
Other connections
08
Basic playback controls
The following table shows the basic controls on the
remote for USB playback. Press iPod USB to switch the
remote control to the iPod USB operation mode.
Connecting a USB device
1
It is possible to listen to two-channel audio using the
USB interface on the front of this receiver. Connect a
Button
What it does
2
USB mass storage device as shown below.
Starts normal playback.
Pauses/unpauses playback.
Press to skip to previous/next track.
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the
iPod DIRECT USB terminal.
/
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
VIDEO
L
R
DIGITAL IN
PHONES
MULTI-ZONE
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ST
–
ST
+
Folder, Repeat One and Repeat All.
Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle On
and Shuffle Off.
USB mass
storage device
DISPLAY
Press repeatedly to change the song playback
information displayed in the front panel display.
/
During playback, press to skip to previous/next
track.
Connecting your USB device to the receiver
TOP MENU Press to skip to first track.
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
2
Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the
Important
receiver to the iPod USB.
No Device appears in the OSD.
If a USB ERR message lights in the display, try following
the points below:
3
Connect your USB device.3
USB ERR
What it means
The USB terminal is located on the front panel.
USB ERROR1
The power requirements of the USB device
are too high for this receiver.
Loading appears in the OSD as this receiver starts
recognizing the USB device connected. After the
recognition, a playback screen appears in the OSD and
USB ERROR2
USB ERROR3
The USB device is incompatible.
4
playback starts automatically.
See Troubleshooting on page 82 for more on
this error message.
Folder/File number
File format
• Switch the receiver off, then on again.
USB
FLD004TRK001
MP3
• Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched
off.
Repeat or Shuffle
Song name
Artist name
Relax Your Body
Kevin Jackson
We are all one
• Select another input source (like DVD), then switch
back to iPod USB.
Album name
Elapsed time
ꢁPlay
0:01
• Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the
device) for USB power.
If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB
device is incompatible.
Note
1 This includes playback of WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC files (except files with copy-protection or restricted playback).
2 • Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) and digital audio players (MP3 players)
of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect this receiver to a personal computer for USB playback.
• Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any loss of
data that may occur when connected to this receiver.
• With large amounts of data, it may take longer for the receiver to read the contents of a USB device.
3 Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device.
4 • If the file selected cannot be played back, this receiver automatically skips to the next file playable.
• When the file currently being played back has no title assigned to it, the file name is displayed in the OSD instead; when neither the album name nor
the artist name is present, the row is displayed as a blank space.
• Note that non-roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.
• It is not possible to output the USB audio to ZONE 2.
54
En
Other connections
08
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers
to an audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation. This receiver plays back WMA
files encoded using Windows Media Player bearing the
extension ‘.wma’. Note that DRM-protected files will not
Compressed audio compatibility
Note that although most standard bit/sampling rate
combinations for compressed audio are compatible,
some irregularly encoded files may not play back. The list
below shows compatible formats for compressed audio
files:
®
play, and files encoded with some versions of Windows
®
Media Player may not play.
• MP3 (MPEG-1/2/2.5 Audio Layer 3) – Sampling rates:
8 kHz to 48 kHz; Bit rates: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (128
kbps or higher recommended); File extension: .mp3
Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• WMA (Windows Media Audio) – Sampling rates: 32
kHz / 44.1 kHz; Bit rates: 32 kbps to 192 kbps (128
kbps or higher recommended); File extension: .wma;
WMA9 Pro and WMA lossless encoding: No
Using XM Radio
• AAC (MPEG-4 Advanced Audio Coding) – Sampling
rates: 11.025 kHz to 48 kHz; Bit rates: 16 kbps to 320
kbps (128 kbps or higher recommended); File
extension: .m4a; Apple lossless encoding: No
XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of
commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news,
talk and entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior
digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae,
from classical to hip hop, XM has something for every
music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the richest
selection of music is matched by its passion for live
sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute news,
standup comedy, children’s programming, and much
more. For U.S. customers, information about XM Satellite
Radio is available online at www.xmradio.com. For
Canadian customers, information about XM Canada is
online at www.xmradio.ca.
Other compatibility information
• VBR (variable bit rate) MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC
1
playback: Yes
• DRM (Digital Rights Management) protection
compatible: Yes (DRM-protected audio files will not
play in this receiver).
About MPEG-4 AAC
Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is at the core of the
MPEG-4 AAC standard, which incorporates MPEG-2
AAC, forming the basis of the MPEG-4 audio
compression technology. The file format and extension
used depend on the application used to encode the AAC
file. This receiver plays back AAC files encoded by
For more details see About XM on page 95.
Connecting your XM Radio receiver
After purchasing an XM Mini-Tuner (sold separately), you
will also need to activate the XM Radio digital radio
service to receive broadcasts.
®
iTunes bearing the extension ‘.m4a’. DRM-protected
files will not play, and files encoded with some versions
of iTunes may not play.
S-
MONITO
OUT
HDMI
VIDEO IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
COAXIAL
®
1
-
2
ASSIGNABLE
VIDEO
OUT
IN
1
(DVD)
RS-232C
IN
2
(CD)
DVD
TV SAT
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
OUT
SIRIU
IN
BD IN
AUDIO
IN
Apple and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
IN
IN
XM IN
CON- IN
L
OPTICAL
IN
1
IN
IN
1
(TV SAT)
R
IN
2
IR
(DVR1)
ZONE2
IN
SPEAKERS
FRONT
ASSIGNABLE
1
R
2
A
-
2
MULTI CH IN
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
ASSIGN-
ABLE
OUT
FRONT
About WMA
1
-
2
OUT
1
L
12 VTRIGGER
2
(
12
OUTPUT
TOTAL
DIGITAL
V
R
50 mA MAX
)
SUBWOOFER
VSX-01TXH
SATELLiTE
RADiO
SATELLiTE RADiO
The Windows Media logo printed on the box indicates
that this receiver can playback Windows Media Audio
content.
XM Mini-Tuner
1
Connect an XM Mini-Tuner to the XM IN jack on the
rear of this receiver.
You will also need to activate the XM Radio service.
Note
1 Note that in some cases playback time will not be displayed correctly.
55
En
Other connections
08
2
Press XM to switch to the XM Radio input.
Using XM HD Surround
XM HD Surround uses Neural Surround™, THX
technologies to achieve optimal surround sound from
XM radio. XM HD Surround Sound is available on select
XM channels only.
For best reception, you may need to move the XM Mini-
Tuner antenna near a window (the southernmost window
should produce the best results).
®
• If after pressing XM the display shows Check XM
Tuner, try disconnecting the receiver and tuner
connections, and then plugging them back in. If the
display shows Check Antenna, try disconnecting the
tuner and antenna connections, and then plugging
•
While listening to XM Radio, press AUTO/DIRECT
for XM HD Surround listening.
See About Neural – THX Surround on page 94 for more on
this.
1
them back in.
XM HD Surround can be selected also with the
STANDARD button.
Listening to XM Radio
After connecting, you will be able to use this receiver to
select channels and navigate categories using the on-
screen display. The information displayed is as follows:
Saving channel presets
This receiver can memorize up to 30 channels, stored in
three banks, or classes, (A, B and C) of 10 channels each.
2
Current preset class
Signal strength
Category
1
Select the channel you want to memorize.
XM Satellite Radio
A
See Selecting channels and browsing by genre above.
Preset number
H i t s
A1
XM025
2
Press T.EDIT
.
Channel number
Artist name
T h e B l e n d
The display shows a blinking memory class.
Elton John
3
Press CLASS to select one of the three classes, then
Song name
Channel name
Candle In the Wind
press / to select the channel preset you want.
You can also use the number buttons to select a preset.
• The default for all presets is XM001.
Selecting channels and browsing by genre
From the XM Channel List, you can browse XM Radio
channels in the order that they appear, or you can narrow
4
Press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop
blinking and the receiver stores the XM channel.
3
your channel search by genre.
XM Satellite Radio
A
XM Channel List
Tip
UP
000 RADIO ID
001 XM Preview
004 The 40s
[ 005 The 50s
006 The 60s
007 The 70s
008 The 80s
DOWN
H i t s
A1
XM025
• You can also press MEM (Memory) during reception
display to save the information of up to five songs.
See Using the XM Menu below to recall this
information.
T h e B l e n d
]
Elton John
Candle In the Wind
ENTER
:
Exit
•
Use / to select a channel, then press ENTER to
Listening to channel presets
You will need to have some presets stored to do this.
listen to the XM radio broadcast.
•
To browse by genre, first press CATEGORY, use /
to select a genre, then press ENTER.
1
Press CLASS to select the class in which the channel
is stored.
• To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.
2
Press / to select the channel preset you want.
Tip
You can also use the number buttons on the remote
control to recall the channel preset.
• You can select channels directly by pressing
D.ACCESS, then the three-digit channel number.
• You can press DISPLAY to change XM Radio
information in the front panel display.
• The currently selected channel is automatically
chosen (without pressing ENTER) after 5 seconds.
Note
1 You can check the strength of reception in Using the XM Menu (page 57).
2 It’s easiest if you have your TV switched on to take advantage of the OSDs. You can, however, use just the front panel display to do everything if you prefer.
3 Select XM000 (RADIO ID) from the on-screen display to check the Radio ID of the XM Mini-Tuner.
56
En
Other connections
08
Using the XM Menu
Connecting your SiriusConnect™ Tuner
The XM Menu provides additional XM Radio features.
To receive SIRIUS Satellite Radio broadcasts, you will need
1
to activate your SiriusConnect™ tuner.
1
Press TOP MENU
.
VSX-01TXH
2
Use / to select a menu item, then press ENTER
.
S-
MONITOR
OUT
HDMI
OU
VIDEO IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
Choose between the following menu items:
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
1
-
2
VIDEO
OUT
IN
1
(DVD)
•
Channel Skip/Add – Use / and ENTER to select
channels you would like to remove/restore from/to
the channel list.
RS-232C
IN
2
(CD)
DVD
TV SAT
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
OUT
SIRIUS ZON
BD IN
AUDIO
IN
IN
IN
IN
OU
XM IN
CON- IN
TROL
L
OPTICAL
IN
1
OUT
IN
IN
1
(TV SAT)
R
IN
2
IR
(DVR1)
ZONE2
IN
•
•
Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of satellite and
terrestrial reception.
SPEAKERS
FRONT
ASSIGNABLE
R
2
A
MULTI CH IN
1
-
2
ASSIGN-
ABLE
OUT
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
1
-
2
OUT
1
L
12 VTRIGGER
2
(
12
OUTPUT
TOTAL
Memory Recall – Use / to browse your saved
song information (See Tip above)
DIGITAL
V
R
50 mA MAX
)
SUBWOOFER
Antenna
3
When you’re finished press TOP MENU to return to
the reception display.
SIRIUS
★
Using SIRIUS Radio
With SIRIUS you get The Best Radio on Radio™ with all
your favorite entertainment including 100 % commercial-
free music, plus superior sports coverage, uncensored
talk and comedy, world-class entertainment, news,
weather and more for your car, home or office. For more
information visit sirius.com or siriuscanada.ca
SiriusConnect™ HOME tuner
AC adapter
1
Connect a SiriusConnect™ tuner to the SIRIUS IN
jack on the rear of this receiver.
You will also need to connect the antenna and AC
adapter to the SiriusConnect™ tuner.
SIRIUS is available in the US for subscribers with
addresses in the continental US and is available in
Canada for subscribers with a Canadian address.
Required subscription plus compatible SIRIUS tuner and
antenna are required and sold separately. SIRIUS
Programming is subject to change. Visit HYPERLINK
“http://www.sirius.com” sirius.com for the most
complete and up-to-date channel lineup and product
information.
2
Press SIRIUS to switch to the SIRIUS input.
For best reception, you may need to move the
SiriusConnect™ tuner antenna near a window (refer to
the manual for the SiriusConnect™ Home tuner for
antenna placement recommendations).
• If after pressing SIRIUS the display shows Antenna
Error, try disconnecting the antenna and
2
reconnecting. If the display shows Check Sirius
Tuner, check the connection of the AC adapter and
this receiver to the SiriusConnect™ tuner.
Note
1 • In order to activate your radio subscription, you will need the SIRIUS ID (SID) which uniquely identifies your tuner. The SID may be found on a sticker
located on the packaging, or on the bottom of the tuner itself. The label will have a printed 12-digit SID number. When you have located the SID, write it
down in the space provided near the end of this manual. Connect SIRIUS on the internet at: https://activate.siriusradio.com
Follow the prompts to activate your subscription, or you can also call SIRIUS toll-free at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474).
• Select 000 (SIRIUS ID) from the on-screen display to check the Radio ID of the SIRIUS Connect tuner (see Selecting channels and browsing by genre on
page 58).
2 You can check the strength of reception in Using the SIRIUS Menu on page 58.
57
En
Other connections
08
3
Press CLASS to select one of the three classes, then
Listening to SIRIUS Radio
press / to select the channel preset you want.
You can also use the number buttons to select a preset.
After connecting, you will be able to use this receiver to
select channels and navigate categories using the on-
1
screen display. The information displayed is as follows:
4
Press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop
Current preset class
Signal strength
2
blinking and the receiver stores the SIRIUS channel.
SIRIUS
A
Category
Preset number
Decades
The '50s
A0
Tip
Channel number
Artist name
005
Chuck Berry
• You can also press MEM (Memory) during reception
display to save the information of up to five songs.
See Using the SIRIUS Menu below to recall this
Johnny B. Good
Chuck Berry
Song name
2
Composer name
Channel name
information.
Listening to channel presets
You will need to have some presets stored to do this.
Selecting channels and browsing by genre
From the SIRIUS Channel Guide, you can browse SIRIUS
Radio channels in the order that they appear, or you can
narrow your channel search by genre.
1
Press CLASS to select the class in which the channel
is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.
SIRIUS
A
SIRIUS Channel List
2
Press / to select the channel preset you want.
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote
control to recall the channel preset.
UP
000 Sirius ID
001 Top 40 Hits
002 Lite Pop
[ 003 Love Songs
004 Easy Listening
005 The '50s
006 The '60s
DOWN
Decades
The '50s
A0
005
Chuck Berry
]
Johnny B. Good
Chuck Berry
ENTER
:
Exit
Using the SIRIUS Menu
The SIRIUS Menu provides additional SIRIUS Radio
features.
•
Press / to enter the SIRIUS Channel Guide, then
2
navigate through the channels one at time with /
then press ENTER to listen to the SIRIUS radio
broadcast.
,
1
Press TOP MENU
.
2
Use / to select a menu item, then press ENTER
.
• To browse by genre, first press CATEGORY, use /
to select a genre, then press ENTER.
Choose from the following menu items:
• Channel Skip/Add – Use / and ENTER to select
channels you would like to remove/restore from/to
the channel guide.
• To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN.
Tip
• Parental Lock – Use / and ENTER to select
channels you would like to place under parental lock.
Channels put under parental lock are not displayed in
the Channel Guide, but may be accessed by directly
inputting their channel number and providing the
parental lock password.
• You can select channels directly by pressing
D.ACCESS, then the three-digit channel number.
• You can press DISPLAY to change SIRIUS Radio
information in the front panel display.
• The currently selected channel is automatically
chosen (without pressing ENTER) after 5 seconds.
• Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of satellite
and terrestrial reception.
•
Memory Recall – Use / to browse your saved
Saving channel presets
This receiver can memorize up to 30 channels, stored in
three banks, or classes, (A, B and C) of 10 channels each.
song information (see Tip above).
• Password Set – Set the parental lock password.
1
Select the channel you want to memorize.
3
When you’re finished, press TOP MENU to return to
See Selecting channels and browsing by genre above.
the reception display.
2
Press T.EDIT.
The display shows a blinking memory class.
Note
1 It’s easiest if you have your TV switched on to take advantage of the OSDs. You can, however, use just the front panel display to do everything if you prefer.
2 You can reset the Channel presets, Memory, Channel Skip/Add, Parental Lock and Password settings in Resetting the system on page 77.
58
En
Other connections
08
2
Press MULTI CH IN on the front panel to turn the
multi-channel input on.
Connecting the multichannel analog
inputs
• Depending on the DVD player you’re using, the
analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be
too low. In this case, the output level of the subwoofer
can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup in
Other Setup. For details, see Multi Channel Input
Setup on page 71.
For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may
have 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 channel analog outputs (depending
on whether your player supports surround back
1
channels). Make sure that the player is set to output
multichannel analog audio.
1
Connect the front, surround, center and subwoofer
Speaker B setup
outputs on your DVD player to the corresponding
MULTI CH IN jack on this receiver.
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the
connections.
Caution
• Before making or changing the connections, switch off
the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in components should be the
last connection you make with your system.
2
If your DVD player also has outputs for surround
back channels, connect these to the corresponding
MULTI CH IN jacks on this receiver.
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the
connections.
• Be careful not to allow any contact between speaker
wires from different terminals.
• If there is a single surround back output, connect it to
the SURROUND BACK L (Single) jack on this
receiver.
• You can use speakers with a nominal impedance
between 6 Ω to 16 Ω (please see Switching the
speaker impedance on page 76 if you plan to use
speakers with an impedance of less than 8 Ω).
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs
If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as
above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs
After selecting Speaker B in Surround back speaker
setting on page 41, you can use the speakers connected
to the (surround back) B speaker terminals on the rear
panel to listen to stereo playback in another room. See
Switching the speaker system below for the listening
options with this setup.
2
for surround sound playback.
/SIRIUS
iPod USB
MULTI CH IN
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back
speaker terminals on the rear panel.
Connect them the same way you connected your
speakers in Installing your speaker system on page 21.
Make sure to review Placing the speakers on page 22
when placing the speakers in another room.
VSX-01TXH
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
IGITAL IN
SE
ROL
ADVANCED
MCACC
DIGITAL PRECISION
PROCESSING
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER
HDMI
D
TV SAT
DVR 1/DVR
2
VIDEO
HDMI 1/HDMI
2
CD/CD-R
FM/AM
XM/SIRIUS
iPod USB
MULTI CH IN
2
Select ‘Speaker B’ from the Surround Back System
MASTER
VOLUME
menu.
R/
ECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
VIDEO
L
R
DIGITAL IN
LTI-ZONE
ON/OFF
See Surround back speaker setting on page 41 to do this.
SPEAKERS
ST
–
ST
+
Switching the speaker system
If you selected Speaker B in Surround back speaker
setting on page 41, three speaker system settings are
possible using the SPEAKERS button. If you selected
Normal or Front Bi-Amp, the button will simply switch
your main speaker system on or off. The options below
1
Make sure you have set the playback source to the
proper output setting.
For example, you might need to set your DVD player to
output multichannel analog audio.
3
are for the Speaker B setting only.
Note
1 To listen to multichannel analog audio you’ll need to select MULTI CH IN (see Selecting the multichannel analog inputs below for more on this).
2 • When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.
• You can’t listen to your speaker B system during playback from the multichannel inputs.
• With MULTI CH IN inputs, it is possible to play pictures simultaneously. For details, see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 71.
3 • The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 48. However, if SPB is selected above, no sound is heard
from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).
• Depending on the settings in Surround back speaker setting on page 41 output from the surround back pre-out terminals may change.
• All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.
59
En
Other connections
08
•
Use the SPEAKERS button on the front panel to
• Make sure that the + / – connections are properly
select a speaker system setting.
inserted.
As mentioned above, if you have selected Normal, the
button will simply switch your main speaker system (A)
on or off.
2
Select the ‘Front Bi-Amp’ setting from the
Surround Back System menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 41 to specify
how you’re using the surround back speaker terminals.
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
VIDEO
L
R
DIGITAL IN
PHONES
MULTI-ZONE
–
+
CONTROL
ON/OFF
S
P
E
A
K
E
R
S
ST
ST
Caution
• Most speakers with both High and Low terminals
have two metal plates that connect the High to the
Low terminals. These must be removed when you are
bi-amping the speakers or you could severely
damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for
more information.
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker system option:
• SPA – Sound is output from speaker system A and
the same signal is output from the pre-out terminals.
• SPB – Sound is output from the two speakers
connected to speaker system B. Multichannel
sources will not be heard. The same signal is output
from the surround back channel pre-out terminals.
• If your speakers have a removable crossover network,
make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing
so may damage your speakers.
• SPAB – Sound is output from speaker system A (up
to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two
speakers in speaker system B, and the subwoofer.
The sound from speaker system B will be the same as
the sound from speaker system A (multichannel
sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).
Bi-wiring your speakers
The reasons for bi-wiring are basically the same as bi-
amping, but additionally, interference effects within the
wire could be reduced, producing better sound. Again, to
do this your speakers must be bi-wireable (that is they
must have separate terminals for the high and low
frequencies). When bi-wiring, make sure you’ve selected
Normal or Speaker B in Surround back speaker setting on
page 41.
• SP (off) – No sound is output from the speakers. The
same sound is output from the pre-out terminals
(including from your subwoofer, if connected) as
when selecting speaker system A (above).
•
To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to
Bi-amping your front speakers
the speaker terminal on the receiver.
Using a banana plug for the second connection is
recommended.
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver
and low frequency driver of your speakers to different
amplifier (in this case, to both front and surround back
terminals) for better crossover performance. Your
speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate
terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement
will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.
1
Connect your speakers as shown below.
This illustration below shows the connections for bi-
amping your front left speaker. Hook up your front right
speaker in the same way.
Caution
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
/
B
R
L
R
L
R
L
A
(Single)
• Make sure you use a parallel (not series, which are
fairly uncommon) connection when bi-wiring your
speakers.
Front left
speaker
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI
• Don’t connect different speakers from the same
terminal in this way.
High
Low
Since both front and surround back speaker terminals
output the same audio, it doesn’t matter which set (front
or surround back) is powering which part (High or Low)
of the speaker.
60
En
Other connections
08
Connecting additional amplifiers
MULTI-ZONE listening
This receiver has more than enough power for any home
use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every
channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the
connections shown below to add amplifiers to power
your speakers.
This receiver can power up to two independent systems
in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI-
ZONE connections. An example MULTI-ZONE setup is
shown below.
Sub zone
Main zone
• Before making or changing the connections, switch
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the
AC outlet.
MONITOR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN
M
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
1
2
IN
3
ANALOG
INPUT
L
R
O
MONITOR
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
3
Front channel
amplifier
R1
DVR2
OUT
SIRIUS ZONE 2
Y
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
ANALOG
INPUT
PB
FM UNBAL 75
AM LOOP
Center channel
amplifier (mono)
ASSIGNABLE
P
R
CD
CD-R
1
-
3
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
SURROU
R
L
R
A
) PPRE OUT
((Single)
IN
F
F
R
R
O
O
N
N
T
T
C
E
N
T
E
R
ANALOG
INPUT
SURROUND BACK
L
R
Surround channel
amplifier
S
SUBWOOFER
D-R
S
U
R
R
O
U
N
D
S
U
R
R
O
U
N
D
B
BACK
ANALOG
INPUT
SURROUND
L
R
L
AUDIO IN
(Single)
L
R
Surround back
channel amplifier
VSX-01TXH
ANALOG
INPUT
Powered
subwoofer
Different sources can be playing in two zones at the same
time or, depending on your needs, the same source can
also be used. The main and sub zones have independent
power (the main zone power can be off while the sub zone
is on) and the sub zone can be controlled by the remote
or front panel controls. However, you may need to specify
the volume settings in ZONE Audio Setup on page 71.
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI
VSX-01TXH
• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround
back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In
this case plug the amplifier into the left (L (Single))
terminal only.
• The sound from the surround back terminals will
depend on how you have configured the Surround
back speaker setting on page 41.
Making MULTI-ZONE connections
It is possible to make these connections if you have a
1
separate TV and speakers for your sub zone (ZONE 2).
• To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the
speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any
speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.
You will also need a separate amplifier if you are not
using the Surround Back System setup (page 62) for your
sub zone.
• If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front
speaker setting (see Speaker Setting on page 48) to
LARGE.
Note
1 You can’t use sound controls (such as the bass/treble controls or Midnight listening) or any surround modes with a separate amplifier in the sub zone.
You can, however, use the features available with your sub zone amplifier.
61
En
Other connections
08
•
Connect a TV monitor to the ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT
MULTI-ZONE listening options
The following table shows what you can listen to in the
sub zone:
jacks on the rear of this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the
surround back speaker terminals as shown below.
Sub Zone
ZONE2
Input sources available
Sub zone
Main zone
iPod, XM or SIRIUS Radio, the built-in tuner
VSX-01TXH
a
and other analog audio sources. With video
sources, only composite video is possible.
OR
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
Y
a.• With the MULTI CH IN input, sound is output only from the front L/R
channels.
PB
FM UNBAL 75
AM LOOP
• The USB audio cannot be output to ZONE 2.
ASSIGNABLE
PR
S
ZONE 2
OUT
1
-
3
PRE OUT
(Single)
IN
IN
OUT
FRONT
CENTER
Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2
)
•
Connect a separate amplifier to the ZONE 2 AUDIO
CD
CD-R
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT
jacks, both on the rear of this receiver.
T
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK /
L
R
L
R
L
(Single)
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub
zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI
Sub zone
Main zone
MONITOR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN
M
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
1
2
IN
3
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls
The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust
the sub zone volume and select sources. See MULTI-
ZONE remote controls on page 63.
R1
DVR2
OUT
SIRIUS ZONE 2
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
VSX-01TXH
CD
CD-R
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
SURROU
R
L
R
A
STANDBY/ON
SURROUND BACK
PHASE
CONTROL
ADVANCED
MCACC
DIGITAL PRECISION
PROCESSING
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER
HDMI
DVD
BD
TV SAT
DVR 1/DVR
2
VIDEO
HDMI 1/HDMI
2
CD/CD-R
FM/AM
XM/SIRIUS
iPod USB
MULTI CH IN
INPUT
SELECTOR
MASTER
VOLUME
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
VIDEO
L
R
DIGITAL IN
AUDIO IN
PHONES
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ST
–
ST
+
VSX-01TXH
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
PHONES
MULTI-ZONE
Surround Back System MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ST
–
ST
+
2)
You must select ZONE 2 in Surround back speaker setting
on page 41 to use this setup. Note that the sound in the
sub zone will be temporarily interrupted when controlling
the main zone (for example, changing the input source or
starting playback).
1
Press the MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF button on the front
panel.
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:
• ZONE 2 ON – Switches the MULTI-ZONE feature on
• ZONE 2 OFF – Switches the MULTI-ZONE feature off
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE
control has been switched ON.
62
En
Other connections
08
2
3
Press CONTROL.
1
• When the receiver is on, make sure that any
operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE 2
shows in the display. If this is not showing, the front
panel controls affect the main zone only.
Connecting an IR receiver
If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or
shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote
control in another zone, you can use an optional IR
receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your
system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of
Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source
for the zone you have selected.
For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source connected
to the CD-R inputs to the sub room (ZONE 2).
5
this receiver.
1
Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR ZONE2 IN
• If you select FM/AM, you can use the tuner controls
to select a preset station (see Saving station presets
on page 36 if you’re unsure how to do this).
jack on the rear of this receiver.
2
Closet or shelving unit
Non-Pioneer
component
• You can’t use the iPod USB, XM and SIRIUS Radio
functions simultaneously with using the MULTI-
ZONE feature.
IR
IN
Pioneer
4
Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the
CONTROL
component
volume.
IN
OUT
This is only possible if you selected the VARIABLE
volume control in ZONE Audio Setup on page 71.
3
S-
HDMI
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
OU
VIDEO
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
1
-
2
VIDEO
D)
IN
1
(DVD)
DVD
AUDIO
5
When you’re finished, press CONTROL again to
RS-232C
IN
2
(CD)
IN
DVD
TV SAT
IN
N
BD IN
CON- IN
AUDIO
IN
return to the main zone controls.
You can also press the MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF button on
XM IN
TROL
CON- IN
TROL
L
CAL
1
L
OPTICAL
1
(TV SAT)
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
1
AT)
R
IN
2
IR
ZONE2
IN
(DVR1)
R
ASSIGNABLE
2
R1)
2
4
1
-
2
MULTI
IR
CENTER S
ZONE2
ASSIGN-
ABLE
the front panel to switch off all output to the sub zone.
OUT
FRONT
1
-
2
OUT
IN
1
L
12 VTRIGGER
2
(OUTPUT
DIGITAL
12
V
TOTAL
)
R
OUT
50 mA MAX
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
MULTI-ZONE remote controls
UT
1
L
SIGNABLE
Set the MULTI-ZONE operation switch to ZONE 2 to
operate the corresponding zone.
IR receiver
2
Connect the IR ZONE2 IN jack of another
The following table shows the possible MULTI-ZONE
remote controls:
component to the IR ZONE2 OUT jack on the rear of
this receiver to link it to the IR receiver.
Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for
the type of cable necessary for the connection.
Button
What it does
Switches on/off power in the sub zone.
Use to select the input source in the sub zone.
INPUT
• If you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR
receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components
with this receiver’s sensor on page 81 to connect to
the CONTROL jacks instead of the IR ZONE2 OUT
jack.
SELECT
Input
source
buttons
Use to select the input source directly (this may
not work for some functions) in the sub zone.
MASTER
VOLUME
+/–
Use to set the listening volume in the sub zone.
Note
1 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE 2 continues to show in the display.
2 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone.
Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.
3 The volume levels of the main and sub zones are independent.
4 • You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.
• If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby.
5 • Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.
• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR compatibility.
• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.
63
En
Other connections
08
Switching components on and off using
the 12 volt trigger
Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat
panel TV
You can connect components in your system (such as a
screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on
or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input
function. However, you must specify which input
functions switch on the trigger using the The Input Setup
menu on page 69. Note that this will only work with
components that have a standby mode.
If you have a Pioneer flat panel TV, you can use an SR+
1
cable to connect it to this receiver and take advantage of
various convenient features, such as automatic video
input switching of the flat panel TV when the input is
2
changed.
Pioneer flat panel TV
12V
TRIGGER
CONTROL
OUT
R
IN
2
IR
(DVR1)
VSX-01TXH
ZONE2
IN
ASSIGNABLE
IN
2
1
-
2
MULTI CH IN
S-
M
HDMI
ASSIGN-
ABLE
VIDEO IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
COAXIAL
1
-
2
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND
ASSIGNABLE
1
-
2
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
IN
1
1
(DVD)
L
RS-232C
12 VTRIGGER
2
IN
2
(CD)
DVD
TV SAT
I
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
OUT IN
BD IN
(
OUTPUT
AUDIO
IN
DIGITAL
12 V
TOTAL
R
IN
XM IN
CON- IN
TROL
50 mA MAX
)
L
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
IN
1
OUT
IN
IN
1
(TV SAT)
R
IN
2
IR
ZONE2
IN
(DVR1)
SPEAKERS
R
ASSIGNABLE
2
A
1
-
2
MULTI CH IN
ASSIGN-
ABLE
VSX-01TXH
OUT
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
1
-
2
OUT
1
L
12 VTRIGGER
2
•
Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to
(
OUTPUT
TOTAL
DIGITAL
12
V
R
50 mA MAX
)
SUBWOOFER
the 12 V trigger of another component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the
connection.
Important
• The trigger maximum power is DC OUT 12 V/50 mA
(50 mA total for terminals 1 and 2).
• You can’t use the SR+ features when HDMI Control
is set to ON. Make sure to set HDMI Control to OFF
when you use the SR+ features (page 67).
After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch
on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on
or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on
The Input Setup menu on page 69.
• If you connect to a Pioneer flat panel TV using an
SR+ cable, you will need to point the remote control
at the flat panel TV remote sensor to control the
receiver. In this case, you won’t be able to control the
receiver using the remote control if you switch the flat
panel TV off.
• Before you can use the extra SR+ features, you need
to make a few settings in the receiver. See The Input
Setup menu on page 69 and SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat
panel TVs on page 72 for detailed instructions.
Note
1 The 3-ringed SR+ cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division for
more information on obtaining an SR+ cable (you can also use a commercially available 3-ringed mini phone plug for the connection).
2 This receiver is compatible with all SR+ equipped Pioneer flat panel TVs from 2003 onward.
64
En
Other connections
08
•
Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR+ cable to connect the
CONTROL IN jack of this receiver with the CONTROL
OUT jack of your flat panel TV.
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer flat
panel TV
When connected using an SR+ cable, a number of
features become available to make using this receiver
with your Pioneer flat panel TV even easier. These
features include:
VIDEO
VIDEO
INPUT 2
• On-screen displays when making receiver settings,
such as speaker setup, MCACC setup, and so on.
Pioneer flat panel TV
INPUT 1
• On-screen volume display.
• On-screen display of listening mode.
DVD player
• Automatic video input switching on the flat panel TV.
• Automatic volume muting on the flat panel TV.
Satellite receiver, etc.
DVD
AUDIO IN
TV SAT
See also SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat panel TVs on page 72
for more on setting up the receiver.
AUDIO IN
VSX-01TXH
STANDBY/ON
PHASE
CONTROL
ADVANCED
MCACC
DIGITAL PRECISION
PROCESSING
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER
HDMI
DVD
BD
T
V
S
A
T
DVR 1/DVR
2
VIDEO
HDMI 1/HDMI
2
CD/CD-R
FM/AM
XM/SIRIUS
i
P
o
d
U
S
B
MULTI CH IN
Important
INPUT
SELECTOR
MASTER
VOLUME
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
VIDEO
L
R
DIGITAL IN
PHONES
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ST
–
ST
+
• The SR+ features do not work when any of the iPod
USB, XM or SIRIUS Radio function is selected.
VSX-01TXH
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
1
GENRE
4
2
MCACC
5
3
SLEEP
MEM
To make the most of the SR+ features, you should
connect your source components (DVD player, etc.) in a
slightly different way to that described in this chapter. For
each component, connect the video output directly to the
flat panel TV, and just connect the audio (analog and/or
digital) to this receiver.
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
6
A.ATT
SR+
SBch
RECEIVER
7
8
9
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
0
MASTER
VOLUME
MAIN
ZONE
2
INPUT
1
Make sure that the flat panel TV and this receiver
are switched on and that they are connected with the
SR+ cable.
See Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat panel TV on
page 64 for more on connecting these components.
• Make sure you have also selected the display input to
which you’ve connected the receiver in The Input
Setup menu on page 69.
2
To switch SR+ mode on/off, press RECEIVER, then
press the SR+ button.
The front panel display shows SR+ ON or SR+ OFF.
• The automatic video input switching and the
automatic volume muting features are enabled
separately; see SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat panel TVs on
page 72.
65
En
Other connections
08
Use a commercially-available cable to connect the
RS-232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack
on this receiver. See the documentation provided with
the Advanced MCACC application for more information.
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC
output
When using the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
(see page 43) to calibrate the reverb characteristics of
your listening room, you can graphically check the
results on your computer connected to this receiver.
RS-232C
Use a commercially-available RS-232C cable to connect
the RS-232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C
jack on the back panel of this receiver (the cable must be
cross type, female–female).
The software to output the results is available from the
support area of the Pioneer website (http://
www.pioneerelectronics.com/PUSA/
Home+Entertainment+Custom+Install). Instructions
for using the software are also available here. If you have
any questions regarding, please contact the Customer
Support Division of Pioneer.
Personal computer
Advanced MCACC output using your PC
Before continuing, make sure you have completed step 1
in Data Management on page 46. Note that transmission
data is erased when the receiver is turned off.
Please make sure your system meets the following
requirements:
®
1
Select ‘Output PC’ and press ENTER.
• Operating system must be Microsoft Windows XP
When the receiver is ready for transmission, Start the
MCACC application on your PC shows on the OSD.
®
(Service Pack 2) or Windows 2000.
• CPU must be at least Pentium 3 / 300 MHz or AMD
K6 / 300 MHz (or equivalent) with at least 128 MB of
memory, and your monitor must be able to display a
minimum resolution of 800x600.
4.Data Management
4e.Output PC
a . MCACC Data Check
b . Memory Rename
c . MCACC Memory Copy
d . MCACC Memory Clear
e . Output PC
Start the MCACC
application on your PC
• An RS-232C port connector is necessary for graphical
output. Refer to the operating instructions and/or the
PC manufacturer for more information on making
the proper port settings.
:Return
:Cancel
2
Start the MCACC application on your computer.
Follow the instructions provided with the application. It
will take about ten seconds for the transmission to
complete, then you will be able to analyze the output on
your computer. Since the data will be cleared from the
receiver when you restart reverb measurement or turn off
the receiver, you might want to save the information on
your PC after measurement.
• System must have internet access.
•
Connect your computer to the RS-232C jack on the
rear panel of the receiver.
Make sure that the receiver and all connected
components are switched off and disconnected from the
1
power outlet when you do this.
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Data Management menu. Continue
with other settings in the Data Management menu if
necessary. Press RETURN again to exit the Data
Management menu.
Note
1 Make sure that you do this before continuing to the Reverb Measurement option in Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 45 (measurement
data is cleared if you switch off the power).
66
En
HDMI Control
09
Chapter 9:
HDMI Control
• To get the most out of this function, we recommend
that you connect your HDMI component not to a flat
panel TV but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on
this receiver.
Important
• The KURO LINK function name used on the web and
in catalogues is referred to as HDMI Control in the
operating instructions and on the product.
HDMI-compatible monitor or
flat panel TV
By connecting this receiver to an HDMI Control-
compatible Pioneer flat panel TV or the HDD/DVD
recorder with an HDMI cable, you can control this
receiver from the remote control of a connected flat panel
TV, as well as have the connected flat panel TV
automatically change inputs in response to operations
carried out on this receiver.
Refer to the operating manual for your flat panel TV for
more information about which operations can be carried
out by connecting via HDMI cable.
AV OUT
AUDIO
DIGITAL OUT
R
L
HDMI IN
• You cannot use this function with components that
do not support HDMI Control.
S-
HDMI
OUT
VIDEOIN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
• We cannot guarantee this receiver will work with
HDMI Control-compatible components other than
those made by Pioneer.
COAXIAL
1
-
2
ASSIGNABLE
VIDEO
IN
1
(DVD)
RS-232C
IN
2
(CD)
DVD
TV SAT
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR
OUT
BD IN
AUDIO
IN
IN
XM IN
CON
T
L
OPTICAL
IN
1
OUT
IN
IN
1
(TV SAT)
R
Making the HDMI Control connections
IN
2
IR
ZONE2
IN
(DVR1)
SPEA
ASSIGNABLE
1
2
A
You can use synchronized operation for a connected flat
panel TV and up to three other components.
-
2
MULTI CH IN
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
ASSIGN-
ABLE
OUT
FRONT
1
-
2
OUT
1
12 VTRIGGER
2
L
Be sure to connect the flat panel TV’s audio cable to the
audio input of this receiver.
(
OUTPUT
12 TOTAL
50 mA MAX
DIGITAL
V
R
)
SUBWOOFER
VSX-01TXH
Important
HDMI-equipped component
• When connecting this system or changing
connections, be sure to switch the power off and
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect the power
cords to the wall socket.
HDMI OUT
• After connecting this receiver to an AC outlet, a 15
second initialization process begins. You cannot
carry out any operations during initialization. The
HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during
initialization, and you can turn this receiver on once
it has stopped blinking.
Setting the HDMI options
You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as
HDMI Control-compatible connected components in
order to make use of the HDMI Control function. For
more information see the operating instructions for each
component.
Setting the HDMI Control mode
Choose whether to set this receiver’s HDMI Control
function ON or OFF. You will need to set it to ON to use
the HDMI Control function.
• When using a TV not manufactured by Pioneer, put
this setting to OFF.
67
En
HDMI Control
09
1
2
3
Press RECEIVER, then press the SETUP button.
Synchronized amp mode operations
By connecting a component to this receiver with an
HDMI cable you can use synchronized amp mode, which
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER
.
Select ‘HDMI Control Setup’ from the Other Setup
2
allows you to synchronize the following operations :
menu.
• Displays on the flat panel TV when you mute or adjust
the volume of this receiver.
7.Other Setup
7d.HDMI Control Setup
a . Multi Channel In Setup
b . ZONE Audio Setup
c . SR+ Setup
d . HDMI Control Setup
e . OSD Adjustment
HDMI Control
OFF
• The input of this receiver is automatically changed
when playback occurs on a connected component.
• Even if you change this receiver’s input to a device
that is not connected by HDMI, the synchronized
amp mode remains in effect.
:Return
:Finish
4
Select the ‘HDMI Control’ setting you want.
• ON – Enables the HDMI Control function. When this
receiver’s power is turned off and you have a
supported source begin playback while using the
HDMI Control function, the audio and video output
from the HDMI connection are output from the flat
• This receiver’s input switches automatically when the
channel is switched on an HDMI control-compatible
flat panel TV.
• By pressing GENRE when listening to a source from
a HDD/DVD recorder, the most appropriate listening
mode is automatically selected (see Using the genre
synchronizing function on page 35 for more on this).
1
panel TV.
• OFF – The HDMI Control is disabled. Synchronized
operations cannot be used. When this receiver’s
power is turned off, audio and video of sources
connected via HDMI are not output.
Canceling synchronized amp mode
Operate the flat panel TV to cancel the synchronized amp
mode.
5
When you’re finished, press SETUP.
You will finish to System Setup menu.
If you cancel synchronized amp mode while connected
via HDMI to a flat panel TV or while you are watching a TV
programme, the power for this receiver is turned off.
Before using synchronization
Once you have finished all connections and settings, you
must:
About HDMI Control
• Connect the flat panel TV directly to this receiver.
Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or
an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause
operational errors.
1
Put all components into standby mode.
2
Turn the power on for all components, with the
power for the flat panel TV being turned on last.
• Only connect components you intend to use as a
source to the HDMI input of this receiver.
Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or
an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause
operational errors.
3
Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is
connected to this receiver, and see if video output from
connected components displays properly on the screen
or not.
4
Check whether the components connected to all
HDMI inputs are properly displayed.
Synchronized amp mode
Synchronized amp mode begins once you carry out an
operation for the flat panel TV. For more information, see
the operating manual of your flat panel TV.
Note
1 • When HDMI Control is set to ON, the audio/video signals input at the HDMI IN terminals are output at the HDMI OUT terminal even when this receiver
is switched off.
• With HDMI Control set to ON, Input Setup and HDMI Input are automatically set to OFF.
2 The linked mode remains in effect even when this receiver’s input is switched to something other than HDMI.
68
En
Other Settings
10
Chapter 10:
Other Settings
5
Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your
component.
The Input Setup menu
For example, if your DVD player only has an optical
output, you will need to change the DVD input function’s
Digital In setting from COAX-1 (default) to the optical
input you’ve connected it to. The numbering (OPT-1 and
2) corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on
the back of the receiver.
You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu
if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to
the default settings (see Input function default and
possible settings on page 70). In this case, you need to
tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which
terminal so the buttons on the remote correspond to the
components you’ve connected.
• If you change the setting to an input that has been
previously assigned to another function (for example,
TV SAT), the setting for that function will
automatically be switched off.
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
EXIT
TUNE TOOLS
MEM
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AUDIO
DISPLAY
CH
TOP MENU
ST
MENU
T.EDIT
TV CTRL
RECEIVER
DVD
DVR 1
FM/AM
BD
DVR 2
XM
TV
CD
HDMI
CD-R
ENTER
ST
• If your component is connected via a component
video cable to an input terminal other than the
default, you must tell the receiver which input
terminal your component is connected to, or else you
may see the S-Video or composite video signals
CATEGORY
RETURN
MAIN
ZONE
2
SETUP TUNE
SIRIUS iPod USB
iPod CTRL
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
1
Use the RECEIVER button to switch on.
instead of the component video signals.
2
Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press
6
When you’re finished, select ‘Next’ to continue to
SETUP
.
the next screen.
The second screen of the Input Setup has three optional
settings:
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use /
// and ENTER to navigate through the screens
and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and
exit the current menu.
• Input Name – You can choose to rename the input
function for easier identification. Select Rename to
do so, or Default to return to the system default.
3
Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.
• 12V Trigger 1 / 2 – After connecting a component to
one of the 12 volt triggers (see Switching components
on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 64), select
MAIN, ZONE 2 or OFF for the corresponding trigger
setting to switch it on automatically along with the
(main or sub) zone specified.
System Setup MENU
6.Input Setup
(1/2)
1 . Auto MCACC
Input
DVD
2 . Surround Back System
3 . Manual MCACC
4 . Data Management
5 . Manual SP Setup
6 . Input Setup
Digital In
HDMI Input
Component In
[
[
[
COAX-1
Input-1
Comp-3
]
]
]
7 . Other Setup
(
NEXT
)
:Exit
:Finish
• PDP In (SR+) – To control certain functions on this
4
Select the input function that you want to set up.
receiver from a flat panel TV, select the display input
The default names correspond with the names next to the
terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD or VIDEO)
which, in turn, correspond with the names on the remote
control.
2
to which you’ve connected the receiver.
7
When you’re finished, press RETURN
.
You will return to the System Setup menu.
6.Input Setup
(1/2)
6.Input Setup
(1/2)
Input
DVD
(
Back
DVD
)
Digital In
HDMI Input
Component In
[
[
[
COAX-1
Input-1
Comp-3
]
]
]
Input Name
Rename
OFF
12V Trigger1
12V Trigger2
PDP In (SR+)
[
[
[
]
]
]
OFF
OFF
(
NEXT
)
:Finish
ENTER:Next
:Finish
Note
1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in Setting the Video options on page 74),
you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.
2 You will have to make an SR+ cable connection from a CONTROL OUT jack on the display to the CONTROL IN jack on this receiver (opposite from the
setup in Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat panel TV on page 64). Note that to control this receiver using the remote, you will have to point it at the flat
panel TV’s remote sensor after making this connection.
69
En
Other Settings
10
Input function default and possible settings
The terminals on the rear of the receiver generally
correspond to the name of one of the input source
functions. If you have connected components to this
receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults
below, see The Input Setup menu on page 69 to tell the
receiver how you’ve connected up. The dots () indicate
possible assignments.
The Other Setup menu
The Other Setup menu is where you can make
customized settings to reflect how you are using the
receiver.
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
EXIT
TUNE TOOLS
MEM
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AUDIO
DISPLAY
CH
TOP MENU
ST
MENU
T.EDIT
TV CTRL
RECEIVER
DVD
DVR 1
FM/AM
BD
DVR 2
XM
TV
CD
HDMI
CD-R
ENTER
ST
Input Terminals
Input source
CATEGORY
RETURN
Digital
HDMI
Component
MAIN
ZONE
2
SETUP TUNE
SIRIUS iPod USB
iPod CTRL
a
DVD
COAX 1
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
BD
(BD)
Use the RECEIVER button to switch on.
a
TV SAT
OPT 1
OPT 2
2
Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press
a
DVR1
DVR2
VIDEO
the SETUP
.
a
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use /
// and ENTER to navigate through the screens
and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and
exit the current menu.
a
(Fixed)
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
iPod USB
XM
(HDMI-1)
(HDMI-2)
3
Select ‘Other Setup’ then press ENTER.
System Setup MENU
7.Other Setup
1 . Auto MCACC
2 . Surround Back System
3 . Manual MCACC
4 . Data Management
5 . Manual SP Setup
6 . Input Setup
a . Multi Ch In Setup
b . ZONE Audio Setup
c . SR+ Setup
d . HDMI Control Setup
e . OSD Adjustment
SIRIUS
CD
COAX 2
7 . Other Setup
:Exit
:Return
CD-R
FM/AM
MULTI CH IN
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to
adjust these settings in order:
a.With HDMI Control set to ON, assignments cannot be made (see HDMI
Control on page 67).
• Multi Ch In Setup – Specifies the optional settings
for a multi-channel input.
• ZONE Audio Setup – Specifies your volume setting
for a MULTI-ZONE setup (see ZONE Audio Setup on
page 71).
• SR+ Setup – Specifies how you want to control your
Pioneer flat panel TV (see SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat
panel TVs on page 72).
• HDMI Control Setup – Synchronizes this receiver
with your Pioneer component supporting HDMI
Control (see Setting the HDMI Control mode on
page 67).
• OSD Adjustment – Adjusts the position of the on-
screen display on your TV (see OSD Adjustment on
page 72).
5
Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.
70
En
Other Settings
10
Multi Channel Input Setup
ZONE Audio Setup
You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multi-
channel input. Also, when the multi-channel input is
selected as an input source, you can display the video
images of other input sources. In the Multi Channel Input
Setup, you can assign a video input to the multi-channel
input.
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTI-
ZONE listening on page 61) you may need to specify your
volume setting.
1
Select ‘ZONE Audio Setup’ from the Other Setup
menu.
7.Other Setup
7b.ZONE Audio Setup
ZONE Volume Level
1
Select ‘Multi Ch In Setup’ from the Other Setup
2
a . Multi Ch In Setup
b . ZONE Audio Setup
c . SR+ Setup
Variable
menu.
d . HDMI Control Setup
e . OSD Adjustment
7.Other Setup
Be careful of loud
volume when "Fixed"
is selected.
a . Multi Ch In Setup
b . ZONE Audio Setup
c . SR+ Setup
:Return
:Finish
d . HDMI Control Setup
e . OSD Adjustment
2
Select the volume level setting.1
:Return
• Variable – Use this setting if you’ve connected a
power amplifier in the sub room (this receiver is
simply being used as a pre-amp) and you will be
using this receiver’s controls to adjust the volume.
2
Select the ‘SW Input Gain’ setting you want.
• 0dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level
originally recorded on the source.
• Fixed – Use this setting if you’ve connected a fully
integrated amplifier (such as another Pioneer VSX
receiver) in the sub room and want to use that
receiver’s volume controls. (This setting is not
available if the surround back system setting is set to
ZONE 2.)
• +10dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level
increased by 10 dB.
7a.Multi Ch In Setup
SW Input Gain
Video Input
0dB
BD
[
]
With the Fixed setting, the source is sent from this
receiver at maximum volume, so make sure the volume is
quite low in the sub zone at first, and then experiment to
find the correct level.
:Finish
3
Select the ‘Video Input’ setting you want.
When the multi-channel input is selected as an input
source, you can display the video images of other input
sources. The video input can be selected from the
following: DVD, BD, TV, DVR 1, DVR 2, VIDEO.
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
7a.Multi Ch In Setup
SW Input Gain
Video Input
[
0dB
BD
]
:Finish
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Note
1 If you selected ZONE 2 in the Surround back speaker setting on page 41, you won’t be able to change the volume level.
71
En
Other Settings
10
SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat panel TVs
OSD Adjustment
Use this feature to adjust your TV display if it seems
difficult to see all the instructions on the screen.
Make the following settings if you have connected a
Pioneer flat panel TV to this receiver using an SR+ cable.
Note that the number of function settings available will
depend on the flat panel TV you’ve connected.
1
Select ‘OSD Adjustment’ from the Other Setup
menu.
See also Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat panel TV on
page 64 and Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer flat panel
TV on page 65.
A
A
7.Other Setup
a . Multi Ch In Setup
b . ZONE Audio Setup
c . SR+ Setup
d . HDMI Control Setup
e . OSD Adjustment
X=
0
,
Y=
0
[
Finish
]
1
Select ‘SR+ Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.
:Finish
7.Other Setup
7c.SR+ Setup
A
A
:Return
a . Multi Ch In Setup
b . ZONE Audio Setup
c . SR+ Setup
d . HDMI Control Setup
e . OSD Adjustment
PDP Volume Control
OFF
2
Use /// to move the display field around
Monitor Out Connect
OFF
[
]
until you get one that you feel best suits your TV.
:Return
:Finish
3
When you’re finished, press ENTER
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
2
3
Select the ‘PDP Volume Control’ setting you want.
• OFF – The receiver does not control the volume of the
flat panel TV.
• ON – When the receiver is switched to one of the
inputs that use the flat panel TV (DVD, for example),
the volume on the flat panel TV is muted so only
sound from the receiver is heard.
Assign any input source connected to the flat panel
TV to the corresponding input number.
This matches the receiver’s input source with a
numbered video input on the flat panel TV. For example,
assign DVD to input-2 if you have connected the your
DVD video output to video input 2 on the flat panel TV.
• The Monitor Out Connect should be set to the input
that you’ve used to connect this receiver to your flat
panel TV.
7c.SR+ Setup
PDP Volume Control
[
OFF
]
Monitor Out Connect
OFF
:Finish
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
72
En
Using other functions
11
Chapter 11:
Using other functions
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
Setting the Audio options
MIDNIGHT Allows you to hear effective
surround sound of movies at low
volumes.
MID/LDN OFF
There are a number of additional sound settings you can
make using the Audio Parameter menu. The defaults, if
not stated, are listed in bold.
MIDNIGHT ON
LOUDNESS ON
LOUDNESS Used to get good bass and treble
from music sources at low
volumes.
Important
BASS
Adjusts the amount of bass.
–6 to +6 (dB)
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the Audio
Parameter menu, it is unavailable due to the current
source, settings and status of the receiver.
Default: 0 (dB)
TREBLE
Adjusts the amount of treble.
–6 to +6 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
1
2
Press RECEIVER, then press AUDIO PARAMETER
.
S.RTRV
(Sound
When audio data is removed
during the WMA/MP3/MPEG-4
OFF
Use / to select the setting you want to adjust.
ON
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the
table below for notes on this.
Retriever) AACcompressionprocess, sound
quality often suffers from an
uneven sound image. The Sound
Retriever feature employs new
DSP technology that helps bring
CD quality sound back to
compressed 2-channel audio by
restoring sound pressure and
smoothing jagged artifacts left
over after compression.
3
Use / to set it as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each
setting.
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
DNR
(Digital
Noise
May improve the quality of sound
in a noisy source (for example,
cassette or video tape with lots of
OFF
MCACC
(MCACC
preset)
Selects your favorite MCACC
preset memory when multiple
preset memories are saved. When M6. MEMORY 6
a MCACC preset memory has
been renamed, the name given is
displayed.
M1.MEMORY1
ON
to
Reduction) background noise) when
switched on.
Default:
M1. MEMORY 1
DIALOG E Localizes dialog in the center
OFF
a
(Dialog
channel to make it stand out from
MCACC OFF
ON
Enhancement) other background sounds in a TV
or movie soundtrack.
EQ
(Acoustic
Switches on/off the effects of EQ
Pro. only for the MCACC preset
ON
b
OFF
HIBITSMP Creates a wider dynamic range
(High Bit) with digital sources like CDs or
DVDs (Smoother, more delicate
musical expression can be
OFF
Calibration memory selected. This setting is
EQ)
available for each MCACC preset
memory.
ON
S-WAVE
Switches on/off the effects of
ON
achieved by requantizing 16 bit
PCM or 20 bit compressed audio
signals to 24 bits).
(Standing Standing Wave Control only for
OFF
Wave)
the MCACC preset memory
selected. This setting is available
DUAL
(Dual
Mono)
Specifies how dual mono
encoded Dolby Digital
soundtracks should be played.
Dual mono is not widely used, but
is sometimes necessary when
two languages need to be sent to
separate channels.
CH1 –
Channel 1 is
heard only
for each MCACC preset memory.
DELAY
(Sound
Delay)
Some monitors have a slight
delay when showing video, so the
soundtrack will be slightly out of
sync with the picture. By adding a
bit of delay, you can adjust the
sound to match the presentation
of the video.
0.0 to 6.0
(frames)
CH2 –
Channel 2 is
heard only
1 second = 30
frames (NTSC)
Default: 0.0
CH1 CH2 –
Both channels
heard from
front speakers
73
En
Using other functions
11
Setting
DRC
What it does
Option(s)
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
c
h
Adjusts the level of dynamic
Adjusts the center image to
create a wider stereo effect with
vocals. Adjust the effect from 0
(all center channel sent to front
right and left speakers) to 10
(center channel sent to the center
speaker only).
0 to 10
AUTO
OFF
C. IMAGE
(Center
Image)
(Applicable
only when
using a
(Dynamic range for movie soundtracks
Range
Control)
Default: 3
(Neo:6 Music),
10 (Neo:6
optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS,
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,
DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master
Audio (you may need to use this
feature when listening to
MAX
MID
Cinema)
center
speaker)
surround sound at low volumes).
LFE ATT
(LFE
Some Dolby Digital and DTS
audio sources include ultra-low
0dB
EFFECT
Sets the effect level for the
currently selected Advanced
Surround mode (each mode can
be set separately).
10 to 90
–5dB/ –10dB/
–15dB/ –20dB/
OFF
Attenuate) bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator
as necessary to prevent the ultra-
low bass tones from distorting the
sound from the speakers.
a.When MCACC OFF is selected, all MCACC preset memories become
deactivated.
b.When EQ OFF is selected, the MCACC indicator does not light even when
a MCACC preset memory is selected.
c.The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select
MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.
d.You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but
if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting back to 0 dB.
e.HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized
amp mode operations.
The LFE is not limited when set to
0 dB, which is the recommended
value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB,
–15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is
limited by the respective degree.
When OFF is selected, no sound
is output from the LFE channel.
f. This feature is only available when the connected display supports the
automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lip-sync’) for HDMI. If you
find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A. DELAY to OFF and
adjust the delay time manually. For more details about the lip-sync feature
of your display, contact the manufacturer directly.
g.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/
Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.
SACD
Brings out detail in SACDs by
maximizing the dynamic range
(during digital processing).
0 to 6 (dB)
d
GAIN
Default: 0 (dB)
e
Specifies the routing of the HDMI
audio signal out of this receiver
(amp) or through to a TV or flat
panel TV. When THROUGH is
selected, no sound is output from
this receiver.
AMP
HDMI
(HDMI
Audio)
THROUGH
h.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema and Neo:6
Music mode.
Setting the Video options
A. DELAY This feature automatically
OFF
(Auto
delay)
corrects the audio-to-video delay
between components connected
with an HDMI cable. The audio
delay time is set depending on the
operational status of the display
connected with an HDMI cable.
The video delay time is
There are a number of additional picture settings you can
make using the Video Parameter menu. The defaults, if
not stated, are listed in bold.
ON
Important
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the Video
Parameter menu, it is unavailable due to the current
source, setting and status of the receiver.
automatically adjusted according
f
to the audio delay time.
g
Provides a better blend of the
front speakers by spreading the
center channel between the front
right and left speakers, making it
sound wider (higher settings) or
narrower (lower settings).
0 to 7
C. WIDTH
(Center
Width)
1
2
Press RECEIVER, then press VIDEO PARAMETER
.
Default: 3
Use / to select the setting you want to adjust.
(Applicable
only when
using a
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the
table below for notes on this.
center
speaker)
3
Use / to set it as necessary.
g
See the table below for the options available for each
Adjusts the depth of the surround
sound balance from front to back,
making the sound more distant
(minus settings), or more forward
(positive settings).
–3 to +3
DIMENSION
1
Default: 0
setting.
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.
PANORAMAg
Extends the front stereo image to
include the surround speakers for
a ‘wraparound’ effect.
OFF
ON
Note
1 Brightness, Contrast, Hue, Chroma, Resolution and Aspect can be set for each input source.
74
En
Using other functions
11
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
ON
Making an audio or a video recording
V. CONV
(Digital
Video
Converts video signals for output
from the MONITOR OUT jacks for
all video types.
You can make an audio or a video recording from the
built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source
OFF
1
Conversion)
connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).
BRIGHT
(Brightness)
Adjusts the overall brightness.
–10 to +10
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an
analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the
components you are recording to/from are hooked up in
the same way (see Connecting your equipment on
page 13 for more on connections).
Default: 0
CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast between
–10 to +10
light and dark.
Default: 0
HUE
Adjusts the red/green balance.
–10 to +10
Since the video converter is not available when making
recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use
the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder
as you used to connect your video source (the one you
want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must
connect your recorder using S-Video if your source has
also been connected using S-Video.
Default: 0
CHROMA Adjusts saturation from dull to
–10 to +10
bright.
Default: 0
a
Specifies the output resolution of
the video signal (when analog
video input signals are output at
the HDMI OUT connector, select
this according to the resolution of
your monitor and the images you
wish to watch). When AUTO is
selected, the resolution is
automaticallyselected depending
on the capability of the display
connected to this receiver. When
PURE is selected, the signals are
output with the same resolution
as when input.
AUTO
PURE
RES
(Resolution)
480p/576p
720p
For more information about video connections, see
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other video
sources on page 18.
1080i
AUTO/
STEREO/
BD MENU
DIRECT
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD
1080p
HDD
THX
DVD
DVR 1
FM/AM
BD
DVR 2
XM
TV
HDMI
STATUS
PHASE
CD
CD-R
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
MEM
SIRIUS iPod USB
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
INPUT
SELECT
DIMMER
RECEIVER
1
2
3
GENRE
MCACC
SLEEP
b
Specifies the aspect ratio when
analog video input signals are
output at the HDMI output. Make
your desired settings while
checking each setting on your
display.
THROUGH
NORMAL
ZOOM
ASP
1
Select the source you want to record.
(Aspect)
Use the input source buttons (or INPUT SELECT).
• If necessary, press SIGNAL SEL to select the input
signal corresponding to the source component (see
Choosing the input signal on page 33 for more on
this).
a.When a resolution value is selected in this setting and the analog signals
input are converted and output as HDMI signals, images may not appear
depending on the video signals being input or the resolution of your
monitor. Also, depending on the source component or the monitor being
used, the output resolution may be different from this setting. Conversion
to 1080p is available only for the input signals of 480i/576i/480p/576p.
b.If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect ratio on
the source component or on the monitor.
2
Prepare the source you want to record.
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD, etc.
3
Prepare the recorder.
Insert a blank tape, MD, video, etc. into the recording
device and set the recording levels.
Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if
you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set
the audio recording level automatically—check the
component’s instruction manual if you’re unsure.
4
Start recording, then start playback of the source
component.
Note
1 • The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the bass/treble controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.
• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.
• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.
75
En
Using other functions
11
•
Press RECEIVER, then press DIMMER repeatedly to
change the brightness of the front panel display.
Reducing the level of an analog signal
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog
signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find
the that the OVER indicator is lights often, or you can
Switching the speaker impedance
1
We recommend using speakers of 8 Ω with this system,
but it is possible to switch the impedance setting if you
plan to use speakers with a 6 Ω impedance rating. Use
the front panel controls to do this.
hear distortion in the sound.
1
GENRE
4
2
MCACC
5
3
SLEEP
MEM
AUDIO
DISPLAY
CH
6
SR+
SBch
A.ATT
TV CTRL
RECEIVER
7
8
9
CLASS
•
With the receiver in standby, press STANDBY/
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
ENTER
0
ON while holding down the SPEAKERS button.
Each time you do this, you switch between the
impedance settings:
MAIN
ZONE
2
MASTER
VOLUME
INPUT
•
Press RECEIVER, then press A.ATT to switch the
input attenuator on or off.
• Speaker 6 Ω – Use this setting if your speakers are
rated at 6 Ω.
• Speaker 8 Ω – Use this setting if your speakers are
rated at 8 Ω or more.
Using the sleep timer
The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a
specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without
worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use
the remote control to set the sleep timer.
Checking your system settings
Use the status display screen to check your current
settings for features such as surround back channel
processing and your current MCACC preset.
MEM
INPUT
AUDIO
DISPLAY
CH
SELECT
DIMMER
3
1
2
MCACC
5
TV CTRL
RECEIVER
THX
STATUS
PHASE
GENRE
SLEEP
4
6
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
MEM
SR+
7
SBch
A.ATT
8
9
CLASS
MAIN
ZONE
2
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
ENTER
0
RECEIVER
•
Press RECEIVER, then press SLEEP repeatedly to set
the sleep time.
1
Press RECEIVER, then press STATUS to check the
60 min
90 min
30 min
Off
system settings.
3
These appear on the front panel display.
The front panel display shows each of the following
settings for three seconds each:
• You can check the remaining sleep time at any time
by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will
cycle through the sleep options again.
Input source
2
↓
Surround Back Processing
↓
Dimming the display
MCACC preset
↓
You can choose between four brightness levels for the
front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the
display automatically brightens for a few seconds.
ZONE 2
↓
HDMI Control
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
MEM
FM/AM
XM
SIRIUS iPod USB
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
2
When you’re finished, press STATUS again to
INPUT
SELECT
DIMMER
RECEIVER
switch off the display.
1
2
3
GENRE
MCACC
SLEEP
4
SR+
7
5
SBch
8
6
A.ATT
9
MAIN
ZONE
2
Note
1 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct modes.
2 You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.
3 If the Pure Direct mode is switched on, some settings above will show OFF, even though they are on.
76
En
Using other functions
Resetting the system
11
Setting
Default
Sound Delay
Dual Mono
DRC
0.0 frame
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to
the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.
CH1
OFF
1
Switch the receiver into standby.
SACD Gain
LFE Attenuate
Auto delay
Digital Safety
Effect Level
0 dB
2
While holding down the front panel STEREO/A.L.C
0 dB
button, press and hold STANDBY/ON for about two
seconds.
The display shows RESET?.
OFF
OFF
Extended Stereo
Other modes
Center Width
Dimension
90
3
Press the front panel AUTO SURR/STREAM DIRECT
50
button.
The display shows OK.
2 PL II Music
Options
3
4
Press HOME THX to confirm.
0
OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver
has been reset to the factory default settings.
Panorama
OFF
Neo:6 Options
All Inputs
Center Image
3 (Neo:6 Music)
• Note that all settings will be saved, even if the
receiver is unplugged.
10 (Neo:6
Cinema)
Listening Mode
(2 ch)
AUTO
SURROUND
Default system settings
Setting
Default
Amp
Listening Mode
(x ch)
AUTO
SURROUND
HDMI Audio
Listening Mode
(HP)
STEREO
HDMI Control
Digital Video Conversion
Speakers
ON
ON
See also Setting the Audio options on page 73 for other default
A
DSP settings.
Surround Back System
Normal
SMALL
SMALL
SMALL
SMALLx2
YES
MCACC
Speaker System
Front
MCACC Position Memory
Channel Level (M1–M6)
Speaker Distance (M1–M6)
M1: MEMORY 1
0.0 dB
Center
Surr
SB
10’00’’
(10 ft. 00 in.)
SW
Standing Wave
(M1–M6)
ATT
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
SWch Wide Trim
Crossover
X-Curve
80 Hz
OFF
EQ Data (M1–M6)
All channels/bands 0.0 dB
EQ Wide Trim 0.0 dB
THX Audio Setting
Inputs
0–1 ft.
See Input function default and possible settings on page 70.
MULTI-ZONE
Zone 2 Volume Type
Zone 2 Volume
Variable
–60 dB
SR+
SR+ Control On/Off
SR+ Volume Control On/Off
Monitor Out
OFF
OFF
OFF
DSP
Surround back channel Processing
Phase Control
ON
ON
OFF
Sound Retriever
77
En
Controlling the rest of your system
12
Chapter 12:
Controlling the rest of your system
3
Use the number buttons to enter the 3 digit preset
code (see below).
Setting the remote to control other
components
The indicator blinks for half a second after you input each
digit and shows a long, two second blink once you have
entered a valid code. If the LED blinks three times, it
means an invalid code has been input or an error has
occurred.
Most components can be assigned to one of the input
source buttons (such as DVD or CD) using the
component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the
remote.
4
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the other components
However, there are cases where only certain functions
may be controllable after assigning the proper preset
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote
control will not work for the model that you are using.
you want to control.
5
When you’re done, press RECEIVER.
To try out the remote control, switch the component on or
off (into standby) by pressing SOURCE. If it doesn’t
seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there
is one).
Note
• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing
RECEIVER. To go back a step, press RETURN.
• After one minute of inactivity, the remote
automatically exits the operation.
Preset code list
You should have no problem controlling a component if
you find the manufacturer in this list, but please note that
there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the
list will not work for the model that you are using. There
are also cases where only certain functions may be
controllable after assigning the proper preset code.
Selecting preset codes directly
ST
ENTER
ST
RECEIVER
SOURCE
CATEGORY
RETURN
SETUP TUNE
iPod CTRL
DVD
SAT
DVD
DVR 1
FM/AM
BD
DVR 2
XM
TV
CD
HDMI
CD-R
Manufacturer Code
AKAI 007
Manufacturer Code
BELL 208
AUTO/
STEREO/
BD MENU
DIRECT
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD
DENON 003, 010
GOLDSTAR 014
ECHOSTAR 205
PIONEER 200, 210
PRIMESTAR 206
RCA 201, 203, 209
SONY 202
HDD
SIRIUS iPod USB
THX
STATUS
PHASE
HITACHI 012
INPUT
SELECT
DIMMER
JVC 004
ANT
MPX SIGNAL SEL
MEM
1
GENRE
2
3
SLEEP
LOEWE 013
MCACC
AUDIO
TV CTRL
DISPLAY
CH
MICROSOFT 017 (video game)
PANASONIC 003, 019
PHILIPS 013
4
SR+
7
5
6
A.ATT
CD
SBch
8
RECEIVER
Manufacturer Code
California Audio labs 304
DENON 309
9
CLASS
PIONEER 000, 003, 009, 018, 020,
021 (BDP), 023 (BDP)
RCA 008, 011
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL
ENTER
0
MASTER
VOLUME
JVC 303
KENWOOD 310, 311, 321
KODAK 322
INPUT
MAIN
SAMSUNG 005
SHARP 006
1
While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP
The indicator on the remote control blinks.
.
SONY 002, 016 (video game)
THOMSON 015
MARANTZ 304, 312, 323, 324
MCS 304
TOSHIBA 001, 022 (HD DVD)
ZENITH 014
MEMOREX 300
NAD 316
2
Press the input source button for the component
you want to control.
ONKYO 307, 308, 320
OPTIMUS 300
LD
When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL, press TV
Manufacturer Code
KENWOOD 103
MITSUBISHI 100
PANASONIC 105, 106
PHILIPS 104
PANASONIC 304, 326
PHILIPS 312, 322
CTRL here.
PIONEER 300, 348 (SACD)
QUASAR 304
1
The indicator lights up.
RCA 302, 313, 319
SANYO 313
PIONEER 100, 111
RCA 107
SONY 101
SONY 301, 316, 317, 318
TEAC 305, 306, 324, 325, 327
THOMSON 319
YAMAHA 314, 315, 328
Note
1 You can’t assign the RECEIVER, FM/AM, iPod USB, XM or SIRIUS buttons.
78
En
Controlling the rest of your system
12
PATHE MARCONI 417
HCM 618
DVR
CD-R
PENTAX 406
HISAWA 618
Manufacturer Code
PANASONIC 491, 492
PIONEER 480, 481, 482, 483, 484,
487, 488, 489, 493
Manufacturer Code
PHILIPS 346
PERDIO 441
PHILIPS 414, 428
PHONOLA 414
HITACHI 606, 610, 618, 624, 625,
634, 635, 664
PIONEER 345
YAMAHA 347
HYPSON 618
PIONEER 400, 407, 414, 437, 438,
439
IMPERIAL 635
SHARP 496
INTERFUNK 635
TV
SONY 490, 494
PROLINE 441
ITC 635
TOSHIBA 485, 495
Manufacturer Code
AIWA 660
PYE 414
JVC 613, 623, 665, 683
KAISUI 618
QUELLE 414
DTV
AKAI 635
ALBA 607
RADIOLA 414
KENDO 635
Manufacturer Code
PANASONIC 230
PIONEER 207, 229
RCA 401, 405, 406, 408, 411, 413,
414, 415, 435, 460, 461, 462, 463
REX 417, 428
KENNEDY 635
AMSTRAD 635
AUDIOGONIC 607, 634
BAUR 607, 635
BEON 607
LOEWE 607
LUXOR 635
ROADSTAR 411
SABA 417, 428
SAISHO 424
SALORA 409
SANSUI 407, 417
SANYO 410, 412, 425, 435
SBR 414
MAGNAVOX 603, 607, 610, 612,
629
VCR
BLUE STAR 618
BPL 618
BRANDT 634
BUSH 607, 635
CATHAY 607
CENTURION 607
CGB 635
CLARIVOX 607
CRYSTAL 635
Manufacturer Code
AIWA 441
MATSUI 635
M-ELECTRONIC 634, 636
MITSUBISHI 602, 609, 610, 621, 682
NEC 659
AKAI 417
ALBA 424
AMSTRAD 441
NOKIA 632, 635
ASA 411, 414
SCHAUB LORENZ 417, 441
SCHNEIDER 414, 441
SEI 414
NORDENTE 636
BAIRD 417, 441
ORION 607
BLAUPUNKT 408, 417, 432
BRANDT ELECTRONIQUE 417
BUSH 424
PANASONIC 607, 608, 622, 635, 671
PHILCO 635
SELECO 417
DAEWOO 607, 676, 677
DANSAI 607
SHARP 402, 418, 419
SIEMENS 411
PHILIPS 607
CGB 441
DECCA 414, 441
DUAL 417
DUMONT 414, 441
FERGUSON 417
FIDELITY 441
PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 634, 635,
636, 637, 638, 639, 667, 668, 669,
670, 678, 679, 688, 689
PROFEX 635
DECCA 607
SINGER 405
SINUDYNE 414
DIXI 607
ELIN 607
SONY 408, 416, 417, 457, 458, 459,
404 (Beta)
EMERSON 635
EPSON 681
PROTECH 635
RADIOLA 607
RADIOSHACK 602, 610, 621, 623
RCA 601, 609, 610, 615, 616, 617,
618
SUNSTAR 441
SUNTRONIC 441
TASHIKO 441
ERRES 607
FINLANDIA 414
FINLUX 406, 414, 441
FIRST LINE 405, 409, 411, 424
FISHER 410, 412, 420, 425, 426, 427
FUNAI 441
FERGUSON 607, 634, 636
FINLUX 607
TATUNG 414, 417, 441
TELEAVIA 417
FORMENTI 607, 635
FRONTECH 635
FUNAI 629, 658
GBC 635
SABA 634, 635, 636
SAMSUNG 607, 673, 674, 675
SANYO 614, 621, 685
SCHNEIDER 607
TELEFUNKEN 417, 428
TENSAI 441
GBC 414
GOLDSTAR 409, 411
GOODMANS 411, 441
GRADIENTE 441
GRAETZ 417
THOMSON 417, 428
THORN 417
GE 600, 602, 607, 608, 610, 611, 617,
618, 628
GEC 607
SHARP 602, 619, 627, 661
SONY 604, 684
TOSHIBA 405, 409, 414, 417, 426,
428
TELEAVIA 634
GENERAL 629, 666
GOLDSTAR 602, 607, 610, 623, 621
GOODMAN 607
GRAETZ 635
GRANADA 607, 635
GRANDIENTE 630
GRANDIN 618
HANSEATIC 607, 635
GRANADA 414
UNIVERSUM 411, 414, 441
ZENITH 403, 404, 417
TELEFUNKEN 634
THOMSON 636
GRANDIG 408, 414, 441
GRANDIN 411, 441
HITACHI 401, 406, 408, 417, 434,
436, 441
TOMASHI 618
CATV
TOSHIBA 602, 605, 621, 626, 663
UNIDEN 687
Manufacturer Code
IMPERIAL 441
YAMAHA 686
ZENITH 603, 620
GENERAL INSTRUMENT 701
JERROLD 701, 702, 703, 704, 711,
712, 713, 714, 715, 716
INTERFUNK 414
ITT 417, 428
ITV 411
PIONEER 700, 718
JVC 407, 408, 414, 417, 428, 429,
430, 431
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 701
S.ATLANTA 705, 706, 708, 709
ZENITH 707, 710, 717
KENDO 424
LOEWE 414, 432
LUXOR 409
Controls for TVs
TAPE
This remote control can control components after
entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the
commands (see Setting the remote to control other
components above for more on this). Use the input
source buttons to select the component.
MAGNAVOX 403, 408, 414, 426
MANESTH 405
MARANTZ 414
MATSUI 424
MEMOREX 411, 441
METZ 432
Manufacturer Code
ARCAM 810
DENON 810
FISHER 813
JVC 802
KENWOOD 804, 807
ONKYO 808, 809
OPTIMUS 800
PIONEER 800, 814
SONY 801, 806
TEAC 805
M-ELECTRONIC 441
MITSUBISHI 407, 408, 409, 414,
420, 421, 422, 423, 424
MULTITECH 441
MURRHY 441
NBC 417
NECKERMANN 414
NOKIA 417
NORDMENDE 417, 428
OCEANIC 417, 441
OPTIMUS 402, 408, 418, 419, 432,
433
ORION 424, 445, 446
OSAKI 411, 441
OTTO VERSAND 414
PALLADIUM 411, 417
PANASONIC 408, 432, 433
• The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are
dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the
TV CTRL button.
TECHNICS 803
YAMAHA 811, 812
Button(s) Function
Components
MD
TV
Press to switch the component
assigned to the TV CTRL button Satellite TV/TV/
Cable TV/
Manufacturer Code
DENON 906
KENWOOD 903
ONKYO 905
on or off.
DTV
PIONEER 900, 907, 908
SHARP 902
INPUT
Switches the TV input. (Not
possible with all models.)
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV/
DTV
SONY 901
TEAC 904
79
En
Controlling the rest of your system
12
Button(s) Function
Components
Controls for other components
CH +/–
Selects channels.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV/
DTV
This remote control can control these components after
entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the
commands (see Setting the remote to control other
components on page 78 for more on this). Use the input
source buttons to select the component.
VOL +/–
Adjust the TV volume.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV/
DTV
SOURCE Switches the DTV on or off.
DTV
Button(s) Function
Components
Switches the TV or CATV between Cable TV/
SOURCE Press to switch the component
CD/MD/CD-R/
VCR/DVD/LD/
BD/DVR
player/
Cassette deck
standby and on.
Satellite TV/TV
between standby and on.
Press to get information on DTV DTV
programs.
AUTO/
DIRECT
Use to choose the BLUE
commands on a DTV menu.
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
Press to return to the start of the CD/MD/CD-R/
current track or chapter.
DVD/LD/BD
player
ADV SURR
Use to choose the YELLOW
commands on a DTV menu.
Repeated presses skips to the
start of previous tracks or
chapters.
STEREO/
A.L.C.
Use to choose the RED
commands on a DTV menu.
Press to advance to the start of
the next track or chapter.
CD/MD/CD-R/
DVD/LD/BD
player
STANDARD
Use to choose the GREEN
commands on a DTV menu.
Repeated presses skips to the
start of following tracks or
chapters.
AUDIO
ANT
Use to switch DTV audio tracks. DTV
Use to select the VHF/UHF
antennas or Cable TV.
Cable TV/TV
Pause playback or recording.
CD/MD/CD-R/
VCR/DVD/LD/
BD/DVR
TOOLS
EXIT
Use to display the TOOLS menu TV
on the flat panel TV.
player/
Use to return to the normal
screen in one step.
TV
Cassette deck
Start playback.
CD/MD/CD-R/
VCR/DVD/LD/
BD/DVR
player/
Cassette deck
RETURN
Use to select RETURN or EXIT.
DTV
Number
buttons
Use to select a specific TV
channel.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV/
DTV
Hold down for fast forward
playback.
CD/MD/CD-R/
VCR/DVD/LD/
BD/DVR
player/
Cassette deck
D.ACCESS Use to add a decimal point when DTV
selecting a TV channel.
ENTER/
CLASS
Use to enter a channel.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV/
DTV
Hold down for fast reverse
playback.
CD/MD/CD-R/
VCR/DVD/LD/
BD/DVR
player/
Cassette deck
MENU
Select different menus from the DTV
DTV functions.
Select the menu screen.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV
Stops playback.
CD/MD/CD-R/
VCR/DVD/LD/
BD/DVR
///
Select, adjust and navigate items Cable TV/
& ENTER on the menu screen.
Satellite TV/TV/
DTV
player/
Cassette deck
Number
buttons
Directly access tracks on a
program source.
CD/MD/CD-R/
VCR/LD/BD
player
Use the number buttons to
navigate the on-screen display.
DVD/DVR
player
D.ACCESS Selects tracks higher than 10. (For CD/MD/CD-R/
example, press +10, then 3 to
VCR/LD player
select track 13.)
80
En
Controlling the rest of your system
12
1
Decide which component you want to use the
Button(s) Function
Components
remote sensor of.
ENTER/
CLASS
Chooses the disc.
Multiple CD
player
When you want to control any component in the chain,
this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the
corresponding remote control.
Use as the ENTER button.
VCR/DVD/BD
player
2
Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component
Displays the setup screen for DVR DVR player
players.
to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the
connection.
Changes sides of the LD.
TOPMENU Displays the disc ‘top’ menu of a DVD/BD/DVR
DVD player. player
Displays menus concerning the DVD/BD/DVR
LD player
MENU
CONTROL
S-V
HDMI
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
current DVD or DVR you are
using.
player
1
-
2
VID
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
1
(DVD)
RS-232C
IN
2
(CD)
Pauses the tape.
Stops the tape.
Starts playback.
Cassette deck
Cassette deck
Cassette deck
Cassette deck
BD IN
AU
L
XM IN
CO
N-
IN
OPTICAL
1
(TV SAT)
IN
OUT
IN
IN
1
R
IN
2
ENTER
/
IR
ZONE2
(DVR1)
IN
ASSIGNABLE
2
1
-
2
Fast rewinds/fast forwards the
tape.
ASSIGN-
ABLE
OUT
1
-
2
OUT
1
L
12 VTRIGGER
2
CONTROL
(
OUTPUT
DIGITAL
12
V
TOTAL
)
R
///
& ENTER
Navigates DVD menu/options.
DVD/DVR
player
50 mA MAX
IN
OUT
CH +/–
AUDIO
DISPLAY
HDD
Selects channels.
VCR/DVD/DVR
player
3
Continue the chain in the same way for as many
components as you have.
Changes the audio language or DVD/BD/DVR
channel.
player
Press to display information.
DVD/BD/DVR
player
Switches to the hard disk controls DVR player
when using a DVD/HDD recorder.
DVD
Switches to the DVD controls
DVR player
when using a DVD/HDD recorder.
Operating other Pioneer components
with this receiver’s sensor
Many Pioneer components have CONTROL jacks which
can be used to link components together so that you can
use just the remote sensor of one component. When you
use a remote control, the control signal is passed along
1
the chain to the appropriate component.
Important
• Note that if you use this feature, make sure that you
also have at least one set of analog audio, video or
HDMI jacks connected to another component for
grounding purposes.
Note
1 • If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, refer to Setting the remote to control other components on page 78.
If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this receiver using the remote sensor.
• See Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat panel TV on page 64 if you are connecting a Pioneer flat panel TV.
81
En
Additional information
13
Chapter 13:
Additional information
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.
Power
Symptom
Remedy
The power does not turn on.
• Make sure that the power cable is plugged in to an active power outlet.
• Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.
The receiver suddenly switches • Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of
off or the PHASE CONTROL
indicator blinks.
wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized
independent service company.
During loud playback the
• Turn down the volume.
power suddenly switches off.
• Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 41.
• Try switching on the digital safety feature (put the receiver into standby, hold down the
ADVANCED/SURROUND button on the front panel and press STANDBY/ON to switch between
SAFETY 1 ON (medium effect), SAFETY 2 ON (more effect) and SAFETY OFF). If the power switches
off even with SAFETY 2 ON, turn down the volume. With SAFETY 1 ON or SAFETY 2 ON on, some
features may be unavailable.
The unit does not respond
• Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.
when the buttons are pressed.
• Try disconnecting the power cable, then connect again.
AMP ERR blinks in the display, • The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Contact a Pioneer
then the power automatically authorized independent service company for help.
switches off. The MCACC
blinks and the power does not
turn on.
AMP OVERHEAT blinks in the • Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on. Check the safety
display, then the power
precautions on page 2 for information on improving heat dispersal.
automatically switches off.
Display blinks 12 TRG ERR.
• An error has arisen in the 12 V trigger jacks. Reconnect accurately then turn the power back on.
The receiver suddenly switches • The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Contact a Pioneer
off or DIGITAL PRECISION
authorized independent service company for help.
PROCESSING indicator blinks.
No sound
Symptom
Remedy
No sound is output when an
input source is selected.
• Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS).
• Make sure the correct input source is selected.
No sound output from the front
speakers.
• Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.
• Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL). Note that when PCM is
selected, you won’t be able to hear any other signal format.
• Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your equipment on
page 13).
• Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page 21).
82
En
Additional information
13
Symptom
Remedy
No sound from the surround or • Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t selected;
center speakers.
select one of the surround listening modes (see Listening in surround sound on page 30).
• Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 48).
• Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 49).
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 21).
No sound from surround back • Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL (see Speaker Setting on
speakers.
page 48).
• Make sure surround back processing is set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel
processing on page 34).
• If the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS-ES with no flag to indicate 6.1 compatibility, then with
surround back processing set to SBch Auto, there will be no sound from the surround back
speakers. In this case, set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 34).
• If the source does not have 6.1 playback channels, make sure that surround back processing is set
to SBch ON and a surround mode is selected (see Listening in surround sound on page 30).
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 21). If only one surround
back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.
No sound from subwoofer.
• Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.
• If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.
• Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 48).
• The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteristics of
your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 48).
• If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings
to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on
page 48).
• Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or a very quiet setting (see Setting the Audio options
on page 73).
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 49).
No sound from one speaker.
• Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 21).
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 49).
• Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 48).
• The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening
mode, you may be able to create the missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 30).
Sound is produced from
analog components, but not
from digital ones (DVD, LD, CD-
ROM, etc.).
• Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 33).
• Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected
to (see The Input Setup menu on page 69).
• Check the digital output settings on the source component.
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any other input source.
No sound is output or a noise is • Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.
output when Dolby Digital/DTS
software is played back.
• Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set
to On.
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.
No sound when using the
• If the HDMI input source is selected, sound is muted until exiting either menu.
System Setup or Status menu.
• If sound is muted in the sub zone (ZONE 2), it will be restored after exiting the System Setup menu.
83
En
Additional information
13
Other audio problems
Symptom
Remedy
Broadcast stations cannot be For FM broadcasts
selected automatically, or
there is considerable noise in
radio broadcasts.
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 24).
For AM broadcasts
• Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 24).
• Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light, motor,
etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.
A multichannel DVD source
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are selected (see Selecting the multichannel analog
appears to be downmixed to 2 inputs on page 59).
channels during playback.
Noise is output when scanning • This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital
a DTS CD.
information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when
scanning.
When playing a DTS format LD • Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 33).
there is audible noise on the
soundtrack.
Can’t record audio.
• You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog recording from an
analog source.
• For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.
• Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks (see Connecting
analog audio sources on page 20).
Subwoofer output is very low. • To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL (see
Speaker Setting on page 48).
Everything seems to be set up • The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on the
correctly, but the playback
sound is odd.
receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the
speakers on page 21).
The PHASE CONTROL feature • If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is
doesn’t seem to have an
audible effect.
set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or
depending on the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).
• Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance on
page 50).
Noise or hum can be heard
even when there is no sound
being input.
• Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source
are not causing interference.
There seems to be a time lag
• See Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 10 to set up your system
between the speakers and the again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).
output of the subwoofer.
Can’t use the SR+ features.
• Make sure that HDMI Control is set to OFF (see Setting the HDMI Control mode on page 67).
The maximum volume
• This is not a malfunction. If the levels in Channel Level on page 49 have been adjusted, the
maximum volume will change accordingly.
available (shown in the front
panel display) is lower than the
+12dB maximum.
84
En
Additional information
13
Video
Symptom
Remedy
No image is output when an
input is selected.
• Check the video connections of the source component (see page 18).
• For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion
is switched off (in Setting the Video options on page 74), you must connect your TV to this receiver
using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.
• Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component or HDMI
cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 69).
• Check the video output settings of the source component.
• Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.
• Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. If
adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 74) and/or the
resolution settings on your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video
Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 74) OFF.
Can’t record video.
• Check that the source is not copy-protected.
• The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video
cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to
this receiver.
Noisy, intermittent, or distorted • Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the
picture.
video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may
also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect
the source and display device using the same type of connection (component, S-Video or
composite), then start playback again.
Settings
Symptom
Remedy
The Auto MCACC Setup
continually shows an error.
• The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see
also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 11). If the noise level cannot be kept low
enough, you will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 41).
After using the Auto MCACC
• There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner, motor, etc.
Setup, the speaker size setting Switch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.
is incorrect.
• Depending on a number of factors (room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some
cases. Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 48, and use the ALL (Keep
SP System) option for the Custom Menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 38 if this is a
recurring problem.
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker • Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are
Distance setting (page 42)
properly.
matched up properly).
The display shows KEY LOCK • With the receiver in standby, press STANDBY/ON while holding down the SPEAKERS button to
ON when you try to make
disable the key lock.
settings.
Most recent settings have been • The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.
erased.
85
En
Additional information
13
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output
Symptom
Remedy
The EQ response displayed in • There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJUST in the
the graphical output following Auto MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve
calibration does not appear
entirely flat.
optimal sound.
• Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment
needed.
• The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.
EQ adjustments made using
• Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these
the Manual MCACC setup on adjustments in the graphical output. However, these adjustments are taken this into account by the
page 41 do not appear to
filters dedicated to overall system calibration.
change the graphical output.
Lower frequency response
curves do not seem to have
been calibrated for SMALL
speakers.
• Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers
that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.
• Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable
sound is output for display.
Graphical output data seems to • If the power is switched off, the measurement data for graphical output to a PC is cleared.
have disappeared.
Display
Symptom
Remedy
The display is dark or off.
• Press DIMMER on the remote control repeatedly to select a different brightness.
• Press DIMMER on the remote control repeatedly to select a different brightness.
After making an adjustment
the display goes off.
You can’t get DIGITAL to
display when using the
SIGNAL SEL button.
• Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see The
Input Setup menu on page 69).
• If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input source.
The Dolby/DTS indicator
doesn’t light when playing
Dolby/DTS software.
• These indicators do dot light if playback is paused.
• Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.
When playing a DVD-Audio
disc, the DVD player display
shows 96 kHz. However, the
receiver’s display does not.
• This is not a malfunction. 96 kHz audio from DVD-Audio discs is only output from the analog
outputs of the DVD player. This receiver cannot show the playback sample rate when using the
analog inputs.
During playback of a DTS 96/24 • Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 33).
source, the display doesn’t
show 96 kHz.
When playing Dolby Digital or • Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.
DTS sources, the receiver’s
format indicators do not light.
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 33).
• Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM.
• Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected.
86
En
Additional information
13
Symptom
Remedy
When playing certain discs,
none of the receiver’s format
indicators light.
• The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on what
audio tracks are recorded on the disc.
When playing a disc with the • Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 33).
listening mode set to Auto
Surround, the 2 PL II or Neo:6
indicator lights on the receiver.
• If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is
not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.
During playback of a Surround • The source may be Dolby Surround EX/DTS-ES software, but it has no flag to indicate it is 6.1
EX or DTS-ES source on the
SBch AUTO setting, the EX
and ES indicators don’t light, or
the signal is not properly
processed.
compatible. Set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 34), then switch
to the THX Surround EX or Standard EX listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 30).
During playback of DVD-Audio, • This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a
the display shows PCM.
malfunction.
Remote control
Symptom
Remedy
Cannot be remote controlled. • Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 8).
• Be sure to operate within 7 m (23 feet) and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel (see
Operating range of remote control unit on page 26).
• Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.
• Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.
• Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jack (see Operating other Pioneer components with this
receiver’s sensor on page 81).
Other components can’t be
operated with the system
remote.
• If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.
• The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.
The SR cable is connected, but • Reinsert the SR cable, making sure it’s connected to the right jack (see Using this receiver with a
the connected components
can’t be operated with the
remote.
Pioneer flat panel TV on page 64).
• Make sure that there is an analog or HDMI connection between the units. This is necessary for the
SR feature to work.
• Check that the other component is made by Pioneer. The SR feature only works with Pioneer
equipment.
USB interface
Symptom
Remedy
USB mass storage device is
not recognized by the receiver.
• Try switching the receiver off, then on again.
• Make sure you have completely inserted the USB connector to this receiver.
• Check that the memory format is FAT16 or FAT32 (FAT12, NTFS and HFS are not supported).
• USB devices with an internal USB hub are not supported.
USB ERROR3 shows in the
display when connecting a
USB device.
• If this message continues to appear after going through all the checks in Important on page 54 of
Connecting a USB device, take the unit to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your
dealer for servicing.
Can’t play audio files.
• The WMA or MPEG-4 AAC files were recorded using DRM (digital rights management), or the bit
rate/sampling rate is not compatible (see Compressed audio compatibility on page 55). This is not a
malfunction.
87
En
Additional information
13
HDMI
Symptom
Remedy
The HDMI indicator blinks
continuously.
• Check all the points below.
No picture or sound.
• This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP-
compatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component, S-Video or composite video
jacks.
• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver
(even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component, S-Video or composite
video jacks between source and receiver.
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor,
please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
• If video images do not appear on your TV or flat panel TV, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor
or other setting for your component.
• If ‘NOT SUPPORT’ appears in the receiver’s display, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor or
other setting for your component.
• While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for audio
output.
• When this receiver reproduces MULTI CH IN audio sources with the HDMI setting set to
THROUGH, you cannot hear audio output from all channels. In this case, make a digital or analog
audio connection.
• To output signals in DeepColor, use an HDMI cable (high speed HDMI cable) to connect this
receiver to a component or TV with the DeepColor feature.
No picture.
• Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 74).
No sound, or sound suddenly • Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP/THROUGH.
ceases.
• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.
• If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection for the audio.
• Check the audio output settings of the source component.
Noisy or distorted picture.
• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the
video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may
also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect
the source and display device using the same type of connection (component, S-Video or
composite), then start playback again.
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor,
please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
HDCP ERROR shows in the
display.
• Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If it is not compatible
with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection (component, S-Video
or composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be
displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.
88
En
Additional information
13
Configuration B
Important information regarding the HDMI
Connect your HDMI-equipped component directly to the
display using an HDMI cable. Then use the most
convenient connection (digital is recommended) for
sending audio to the receiver. See the operating
instructions for more on audio connections. Set the
display volume to minimum when using this
configuration.
connection
There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI
signals through this receiver (this depends on the HDMI-
equipped component you are connecting–check with the
manufacturer for HDMI compatibility information).
If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly through this
receiver (from your component), please try one of the
following configurations when connecting up.
Note
Configuration A
• If your display only has one HDMI terminal, you can
only receive HDMI video from the connected
component.
Use component video cables to connect the video output
of your HDMI-equipped component to the receiver’s
component video input. The receiver can then convert the
analog component video signal to a digital HDMI signal
for transmission to the display. For this configuration,
use the most convenient connection (digital is
recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the
operating instructions for more on audio connections.
• Depending on the component, audio output may be
limited to the number of channels available from the
connected display unit (for example audio output is
reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio
limitations).
• If you want to switch the input source, you’ll have to
switch functions on both the receiver and your
display unit.
Note
• The picture quality will change slightly during
conversion.
• Since the sound is muted on the display when using
the HDMI connection, you must adjust the volume on
the display every time you switch input sources.
XM radio messages
Symptom
Cause
Action
Check XM Tuner
The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed or not fully seated Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the dock
in the XM Mini-Tuner Dock or the XM Mini-Tuner
dock is not connected to this receiver.
and check the XM Mini-Tuner dock cable is
connected to this receiver.
Check Antenna
Loading
The XM antenna is not connected to the XM Mini-
Tuner Dock or the XM antenna cable is damaged.
Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to
the XM Mini-Tuner Dock and check the antenna
cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna if the
cable is damaged.
The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or program
information from the XM satellite signal. This
message can also occur in weak XM signal
conditions.
This message should disappear in a few seconds in
good signal conditions.
If you see this message often, reposition the XM
antenna for better signal reception.
Note that this receiver may not respond to some
buttons while this message is displayed.
Use the Antenna Aiming option to optimize the
antenna position.
No Signal
The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the XM satellite Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the
signal. Something may be blocking the XM XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the
antenna’s view of the satellites or the antenna is not Antenna Aiming option to optimize the antenna
properly aimed.
position.
See instructions supplied with the XM Mini-Tuner
and Dock for antenna installation information.
Off Air
You selected an XM channel that is not currently
broadcasting.
Check back later; in the mean time, select another
channel.
CH Unauthorized
You selected an XM channel that is blocked or
cannot be receive with your XM subscription
package.
Consult the latest channel guide at
www.xmradio.com for the current list of channels.
For information on receiving this channel, visit
www.xmradio.com or contact XM Satellite Radio at
1-800-967-2346.
89
En
Additional information
13
Symptom
Cause
Action
CH Unavailable
The selected channel is not available. The channel Consult the latest channel guide at
may have been reassigned to a different channel
number.
www.xmradio.com for the current list of channels.
For cases of a new radio or a radio that has not
received XM’s signal for an extended period, allow
the radio to receive the XM satellite signal for at least
5 minutes and then try to select the channel again.
This message may occur initially with a new radio or
a radio that has not received XM’s signal for an
extended period.
– – – – – – – –
No artist name or song title is available for this
selection.
No action required.
Upgrade XM Tuner
The connected XM CNP-1000 is incompatible. This Contact XM Listener Care (1-800-967-2346) and ask
receiver features advanced technology that is
designed for use with the XM Mini-Tuner.
about upgrading your XM CNP-1000 to an XM Mini-
Tuner.
Have this receiver’s model name and CNP-1000 XM
Radio ID number ready beforehand, and explain that
this receiver is displaying the message Upgrade XM
Tuner.
If you already have an XM Mini-Tuner connected and
you see this message, turn off this receiver, make
sure the XM Mini-Tuner is properly seated in the
Mini-Tuner Dock, and then turn this receiver On
again. If the message reappears, contact XM
Listener Care and explain the issue that you’re
experiencing and the corrective actions you’ve tried.
XM Power Error
A short-circuit occurring in the antenna or
surrounding antenna cable.
Make sure that there is nothing unusual with the
antenna or antenna cable. Switch the power off,
then back on again.
SIRIUS radio messages
Symptom
Cause
Action
Antenna Error
Check Sirius Tuner
Antenna is not properly connected.
SIRIUS Connect tuner is not properly connected.
Check that the antenna cable is attached securely.
Check that the 8 pin mini DIN cable and AC Adapter
are attached securely.
Acquiring Signal
The SIRIUS signal is too weak at the current location. n/a
Subscription Updating Unit is updating subscription.
Wait until the encryption code has been updated.
Wait until the encryption code has been updated.
Select another channel.
Updating Channels
Invalid Channel
Unit is updating channels.
Selected channel is not available/does not exist.
Note
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
90
En
Additional information
Surround sound formats
13
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds
surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack,
which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for
enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail.
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound
formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and
terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is the next-generation audio
technology for all high-definition programming and
media. It combines the efficiency to meet future
broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to
realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming
high-definition era. Built on Dolby Digital, the multi-
channel audio standard for DVD and HD broadcasts
worldwide, Dolby Digital Plus was designed for the next-
generation A/V receivers but remains fully compatible
with all current A/V receivers.
Dolby
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See
www.dolby.com for more detailed information.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi-channel audio programs of
up to 7.1 channels (*) and supports multiple programs in a
single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate
potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate
performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1.7 Mbps on
Blu-ray Disc, and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams for
playback on existing Dolby Digital systems. Dolby Digital
Plus can accurately reproduce the sound originally intended
by directors and producers.
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding
system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD
and digital broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six
discrete audio channels, comprising five full range
channels and a special LFE (low frequency effects)
channel used mainly for deep, rumbling sound effects;
hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby Digital.
In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital
decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono,
stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit
rates and channels. Another feature, called Dialog
Normalization, attenuates programs based on the
average level of dialog in a program relative to its peak
level (also known as Dialnorm) in order to achieve
uniform playback level.
It also features multi-channel sound with discrete
channel output, interactive mixing and streaming
capability in advanced systems. Supported by High-
Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital
connection is possible for high-definition audio and
video.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby Digital Surround EX
Dolby TrueHD is the next-generation lossless encoding
technology developed for high-definition optical discs in
the upcoming era. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing
sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master,
unlocking the true high-definition entertainment
experience on high-definition optical discs in the next
generation. When coupled with high-definition video,
Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented home theater
experience with stunning sound and high-definition
picture.
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended)
is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a
surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left/
right channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for
compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as
well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby
Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using
the innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system
extracts surround sound from sources as follows:
It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8
full-range channels (*) individually with 24-bit/96 kHz
audio. It also features extensive metadata including
dialogue normalization and dynamic range control.
Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a
single-cable digital connection is possible for high-
definition audio and video.
• Dolby Pro Logic – 4.1 channel sound (mono
surround) from any stereo source
• Dolby Pro Logic II – 5.1 channel sound (stereo
surround) from any stereo source
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx – 6.1 or 7.1 channel sound
(stereo surround and surround back) from two
channel or 5.1 (and 6.1) channel sources
* HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc standards currently limit
their maximum number of audio channels to eight,
whereas Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD
support more than eight audio channels.
With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is
generated by bass management in the receiver.
91
En
Additional information
13
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
DTS-EXPRESS
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology
supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer
rates. This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD
DVD and secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting
the potential applicability to upcoming broadcasts and
memory audio contents.
DTS
The DTS technologies are explained below. See
www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers
master audio sources recorded in a professional studio
to listeners without any loss of data, preserving audio
quality. DTS-HD Master Audio adopts variable data
transfer rates, facilitating data transfer to the maximum
rate of 24.5 Mbps in the Blu-ray disc format, 18.0 Mbps in
the HD-DVD format, which by far exceeds that of a
standard DVD. These high data transfer rates enable
lossless transmission of 96 kHz/24-bit 7.1-channel audio
sources without deteriorating the quality of the original
sound. DTS-HD Master Audio is an irreplaceable
technology that can reproduce sound faithfully as
intended by the creator of music or movies.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding
system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and
video games. It can deliver up to six discrete audio
channels, comprising five full range channels, including
an LFE channel. Higher sound quality is achieved
through the use of a low compression rate, and high
rates of transmittance during playback.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s:
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616;
6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued &
pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos,
Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are
trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a
decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES
Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources.
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with
a completely separate (discrete) surround back channel.
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a surround back channel matrixed
into the surround left/right channels. Both sources are
also compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 channel
decoder.
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9 Pro) is a
discrete surround format developed by Microsoft
Corporation.
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound
from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV)
and from 5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel
information already encoded into the source, as well as
its own processing to determine channel localization
(with two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is
generated by bass management in the receiver). Two
modes (Cinema and Music) are available using DTS
Neo:6 with two channel sources.
WMA9 Pro can support up to 5.1/7.1 channel playback
with sampling rates up to 24-bit/96 kHz. Using the unique
WMA compression techniques, WMA9 Pro can deliver
multichannel music and soundtracks over high-speed
internet networks at low bit rates with minimal audio
degradation. Playback may be enjoyed with the Windows
Media™ Player 9 Series (or above) and other third-party
media players on a personal computer, or with an AV
amplifier with on-board WMA9 Pro decoding.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital
Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio
using a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully
backward compatible with all existing decoders. This
means that DVD players can play this software using a
conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
92
En
Additional information
13
amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other
parameters in both the digital and analog domain.
About THX
•
THX Surround EX
The THX technologies are explained below. See
www.thx.com for more detailed information.
THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development
of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film
soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX
technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been
added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called
Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the
currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right,
surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel
provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the
listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound
localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the
Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home
consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the
packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be
found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com.
•
THX Cinema processing
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by
THX Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your
experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your
home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended.
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called
dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres
with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then
transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not
changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX
engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate
the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home,
correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product,
when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added
in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).
Only amplifier and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX
logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this
new technology in the home.
This product may also engage the “THX Surround EX” mode during
the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital
Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the
Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may
not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the
tastes of the individual listener.
•
Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed
to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal
surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater
system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround
Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and
Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close together
facing the front of the room as shown in the diagram will provide the
largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to place the
Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to go THX Audio Set-up
screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the
speaker spacing, which will re-optimize the surround sound-field.
ASA is used in three new modes; THX Select2 CINEMA, THX Select2
MUSIC and THX Select2 GAMES.
•
Re-Equalization
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and
harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because
film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie
theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization
restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in
a small home environment.
•
Timbre Matching
The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the
direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is
an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all
around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to
the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the
information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely
match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front
speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and
surround speakers.
•
THX Music
For the replay of multi-channel music the THX MusicMode should be
selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround
channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital
and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.
•
Adaptive Decorrelation
•
THX Games
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create
an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre
there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround
speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and
envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest
speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive
Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel’s time and
phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This
expands the listening position and creates—with only two speakers—
the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.
For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX
Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing
is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game
sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately
places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360
degree playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives
you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field.
•
THX Select2 Plus
Before any home theatre component can be THX Select2 Plus
certified, it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a
rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a
product feature the THX Select2 Plus logo, which is your guarantee
that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb
performance for many years to come. THX Select2 Plus requirements
cover every aspect of the product including pre-amplifier and power
93
En
Additional information
13
•
THX Loudness Plus Description
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology featured in
THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX Select2 Plus™ Certified amplifiers. With
THX Loudness Plus, home theater audiences can now experience the
rich details in a surround mix at any volume level. A consequence of
turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain sound
elements can be lost or perceived differently by the listener. THX
Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial shifts that occur
when the volume is reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient
surround channel levels and frequency response. This enables users
to experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume
setting. THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in
any THX listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX
Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plus
settings for each type of content.
About Neural – THX Surround
®
Neural-THX Surround is taking surround sound to the next level. This
•
ASA Description
revolutionary new technology delivers the rich envelopment and
discrete image detail of surround sound in a format that is fully
compatible with stereo from various content sources. Neural-THX
Surround enables 5.1, 6.1 and 7.1-channel support for gaming, movies
and digital music. By unmasking the audio details, typically lost by
other playback modes, audiences will experience the deep ambience
and subtle details of movies, music and games.
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed
to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal
surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater
system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround
Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and
Subwoofer), be sure to go to the THX Audio Set-up screen and choose
the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing,
which will re-optimize the surround sound-field. ASA is used in three
modes; THX Ultra2 Cinema, THX Ultra2 Music and THX Ultra2 Games.
®
Neural-THX Digital Music™ is a new surround mode specifically
designed to enhance the playback of compressed digital music content.
It provides listeners with an expanded sound stage and clean surround
experience, even with compressed audio sources such as MP3s and
Internet streams.
Neural-THX Surround has been chosen as the official surround sound
format for XM Satellite Radio’s “XM HD Surround,” TV sports
broadcasting, 7.1 games, Music Direct Internet streaming as well as
leading FM/HD radio stations worldwide. And with this technology
being used by sound designers during content creation, as well as
embedded into playback devices, Neural-THX Surround promises a
listening experience that is true to the original mix.
•
THX Select2 Cinema
THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers
giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode,
ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back
surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and
directional surround sounds.
DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX
encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Select2
Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded.
For additional information, please visit www.neuralsurround.com.
This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio
Corporation and THX Ltd. PIONEER hereby grants the user a non-
exclusive, non-transferable, limited right of use to this product under
USA and foreign patent, patent pending and other technology or
trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. “Neural
Surround”, “Neural Audio”, “Neural” and “NRL” are trademarks and
logos owned by Neural Audio Corporation, THX is a trademark of THX
Ltd., which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital
flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that
you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select
the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Select2 Cinema
mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.
•
THX Select2 Music
For the playback of multi-channel music the THX Select2 Music mode
should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the
surround channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS,
Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear
soundstage.
•
THX Select2 Games
For the playback of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX
Select2 Games mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA
processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0
encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital.
This accurately places all game audio surround information,
providing a full 360 degree playback environment. THX Select2 Games
mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all
points of the surround field.
THX, the THX logo and Select2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd. which
may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. All other
trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
94
En
Additional information
13
your XM Ready audio system on for up to an hour. When you can
access the full lineup on your XM Ready audio system you are done.
About XM
®
XM Ready is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. The
®
XM name and related logo are registered trademarks of XM Satellite
Radio Inc. All rights reserved.
About SIRIUS
U.S. & CANADIAN PRODUCTS
NOTE: The below XM Radio company, legal and subscription
SIRIUS and the Sirius READY logo are registered trademarks of
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
®
information is required in all XM Ready user manuals in its entirety.
About XM Radio
XM is North America’s number one satellite radio company, offering
an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in
premier sports, news, talk radio, comedy, children’s and
entertainment programming, broadcast in superior digital audio
quality coast to coast. For more information, or to subscribe, U.S.
customers visit xmradio.com or call XM Listener Care at 1-800-
XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346); Canadian customers visit xmradio.ca or
call XM Listener Care at 1-877-GETXMSR (1-877-438-9677).
®
XM Ready Legal
XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and
Home Dock required (each sold separately) to receive XM service. It
is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer,
hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or
software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM satellite
Radio System. Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including
a one-time activation fee may apply. All fees and programming
subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are
indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio
receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO (U.S. residents) and 1-877-
GETXMSR (Canadian residents). Only available in the 48 contiguous
United States and Canada. ©2008 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights
reserved.
®
XM Ready Subscription
Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, inserted the
XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock to your XM
®
Ready audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to
subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There are three
places to find your eight character XM Radio ID: On the XM Mini-
Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0. Record
the Radio ID below for reference.
Note: The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”.
Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at
http://activate.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346).
Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in Canada online at
https://activate.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677).
You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the
satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes
10-15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep
95
En
Additional information
13
Listening modes with different input signal formats
The following charts outline the listening modes available with different input signal formats, depending on the
surround back channel processing and decoding method you have selected.
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
SBch Processing Input signal format
Standard
THX
Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON/AUTO
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
Stereo playback
a
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
(except for 176.4 kHz/ 2 Pro Logic llx GAME
b
THX Select2 GAMES
(Automatically
selects 6.1/7.1
channel
192 kHz)
a
2 PRO LOGIC
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
decoding)
2 Pro Logic llx GAME+THX
GAMES
Dolby TrueHD
As above
Stereo playback
As above
As above
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD
Stereo playback
THX CINEMA
THX MUSIC
THX GAMES
DTS-EXPRESS
Dolby Digital Surround 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 Pro Logic llx GAME+THX
a
2 PRO LOGIC
GAMES
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
b
THX Select2 GAMES
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
a
2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMA
DTS Surround
SACD
As above
As above
As above
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
Stereo playback
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
XM Radio
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
XM HD Surround
a
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
b
THX GAMES MODE
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
XM HD Surround
Other stereo sources 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
Stereo playback
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 Pro Logic llx GAME+THX
a
2 PRO LOGIC
GAMES
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
b
THX Select2 GAMES
c
Neural THX
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
a
2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMA
96
En
Additional information
13
SBch Processing Input signal format
Standard
THX
Auto Surround
SBch
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
Stereo playback
Processing
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
d
OFF
CINEMA
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME+THX
GAMES
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
Dolby TrueHD
As above
Stereo playback
As above
As above
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD
Stereo playback
THX CINEMA
THX MUSIC
THX GAMES
DTS-EXPRESS
Dolby Digital Surround 2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
CINEMA
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
Neo:6 CINEMA
2 Pro Logic ll GAME+THX
Neo:6 MUSIC
GAMES
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
DTS Surround
SACD
As above
As above
As above
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
Stereo playback
2 PRO LOGIC ll MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
XM Radio
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
XM HD Surround
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
XM HD Surround
Other stereo sources
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
Stereo playback
CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME+THX
a
2 PRO LOGIC
GAMES
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
c
Neural THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
a.No sound is output from the surround back speakers when 2 Pro Logic is selected.
b.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
c.This is only selectable when the input signal is an analog or PCM signal.
d.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.
97
En
Additional information
13
Multichannel signal formats
SBch Processing Input signal format
Standard
THX
Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD
Straight decoding
THX CINEMA
THX MUSIC
THX GAMES
Straight decoding
(7.1 channel
decoding used
for all sources)
DTS-HD Master Audio
WMA9 Pro
PCM
(6.1/7.1 channel)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby Digital EX
THX SURROUND EX
Dolby Digital EX
a
a
2 Pro Logic llx
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
a
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
MOVIE
a
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
THX Select2 CINEMA
a
THX Select2 MUSIC
(5.1 channel)
a
THX Select2 GAMES
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
b
2 EX+THX GAMES
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
As above
Straight decoding
As above
b
DTS-EXPRESS
DTS-HD
Straight decoding
Straight decoding
THX CINEMA
a
THX Select2 CINEMA
DTS-HD Master Audio
(5.1 channel)
a
THX Select2 MUSIC
a
THX Select2 GAMES
b
THX MUSIC
b
THX GAMES
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX
THX SURROUND EX
Dolby Digital EX
(6.1 channel flagged)
a
a
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
2 Pro Logic IIx
a
a
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
MOVIE
THX Select2 CINEMA
a
THX Select2 MUSIC
a
THX Select2 GAMES
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
b
2 EX+THX GAMES
98
En
Additional information
13
SBch Processing Input signal format
Standard
THX
Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON
DTS-ES
(6.1 channel sources/
6.1 channel flagged)
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES Matrix+THX CINEMA DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS-ES Discrete+THX CINEMA
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
a
DTS+2 Pro Logic IIx
MOVIE
(7.1 channel
decoding used
for all sources)
a
MOVIE+THX
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
a
MUSIC
THX Select2 CINEMA
a
THX Select2 MUSIC
a
THX Select2 GAMES
b
DTS-ES Matrix+THX MUSIC
b
DTS-ES Matrix+THX GAMES
b
DTS-ES Discrete+THX MUSIC
b
DTS-ES Discrete+THX GAMES
DTS and DTS 96/24
DTS+Neo:6
DTS+Neo:6+THX CINEMA
DTS+Neo:6
(5.1 channel encoding)
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
DTS+2 Pro Logic IIx
a
a
MOVIE
MOVIE+THX
a
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
THX Select2 CINEMA
MUSIC
a
THX Select2 MUSIC
a
THX Select2 GAMES
b
DTS+Neo:6+THX MUSIC
b
DTS+Neo:6+THX GAMES
a
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
Dolby Digital
WMA9 Pro
Dolby Digital EX
THX SURROUND EX
Dolby Digital EX
a
a
2 Pro Logic llx
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
a
PCM
MOVIE
a
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
THX Select2 CINEMA
(5.1 channel encoding)
a
THX Select2 MUSIC
a
THX Select2 GAMES
a
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
b
2 EX+THX GAMES
SACD
As above
THX Select2 MUSIC
As above
(5.1 channel encoding)
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
99
En
Additional information
13
SBch Processing Input signal format
Standard
THX
Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
AUTO
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD
Straight decoding
THX CINEMA
Straight decoding
(Automatically
selects 6.1/7.1
channel
DTS-HD Master Audio
WMA9 Pro
PCM
decoding)
(6.1/7.1 channel)
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
As above
Straight decoding
As above
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX
THX SURROUND EX
Dolby Digital EX
(6.1 channel flagged)
a
2 Pro Logic llx
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
a
MOVIE
DTS-ES (6.1 channel
sources/6.1 channel
flagged)
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES+THX (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
a
Other 5.1 channel
sources
Straight decoding
Straight decoding
THX Select2 CINEMA
b
THX CINEMA
(5.1 channel encoding)
a
SACD
As above
As above
THX Select2 MUSIC
(5.1 channel encoding)
b
THX MUSIC
SBch
SACD
Straight decoding
THX MUSIC
Straight decoding
Processing
(5.1 channel)
c
OFF
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1
channel sources
As above
THX CINEMA
THX MUSIC
THX GAMES
As above
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
b.This can be selected when only one surround speaker is connected.
c.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.
100
En
Additional information
13
Stream direct with different input signal formats
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see
Using Stream Direct on page 33) you have selected.
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
Surround Back speaker(s)
Connected
Input signal format
DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
Dolby Digital Surround
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
DTS Surround
Other stereo sources
Analog sources
Neo:6 CINEMA
Stereo playback
As above
Neo:6 CINEMA
Stereo playback
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
Not connected
Dolby Digital Surround
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
DTS Surround
Other stereo sources
Analog sources
Neo:6 CINEMA
Stereo playback
As above
Neo:6 CINEMA
Stereo playback
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
Multichannel signal formats
Surround Back speaker(s)
Connected
Input signal format
DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX
a
a
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel
flagged)
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources
All 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources
Straight decoding
Straight decoding
Straight decoding
Straight decoding
Not connected
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
101
En
Additional information
Specifications
13
FM Tuner Section
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz
Usable Sensitivity . . . . . . . Mono: 13.2 dBf, IHF (1.3 µV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 20.2 dBf
Stereo: 38.6 dBf
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 73 dB (at 85 dBf)
Stereo: 70 dB (at 85 dBf)
Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stereo: 0.5 % (1 kHz)
Alternate Channel Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 dB (400 kHz)
Stereo Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 dB (1 kHz)
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Hz to 15 kHz 1 dB
Antenna Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Ω unbalanced
Amplifier section
Continuous average power output of 110 watts* per
channel, min., at 8 ohms, from 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz
with no more than 0.09 %** total harmonic
distortion (front).
Continuous Power Output (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω, 0.09 %)
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 W + 110 W
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 W
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 W + 110 W
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 W + 110 W
AM Tuner Section
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 kHz to 1 700 kHz
Sensitivity (IHF, Loop antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 µV/m
Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 dB
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna
Continuous Power Output (1 kHz, 6 Ω, 1.0 %)
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W + 150 W
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W + 150 W
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W + 150 W
Miscellaneous
Total harmonic distortion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.09 %
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 W
In standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.6 W (HDMI Control OFF)
0.75 W (HDMI Control ON)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 110 W, 8 Ω)
* Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade Commission’s
Trade Regulation rule on Power Output Claims for Amplifiers
** Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer
Dimensions . . . . . . 420 (W) mm x 173 (H) mm x 433 (D) mm
(16 9/16 (W) in. x 6 13/16 (H) in. x 17 1/16 (D) in.)
Weight (without package) . . . . . . . . . . . .13.3 kg (29 lbs 6 oz)
Audio Section
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)
Furnished Parts
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 mV/47 kΩ
Frequency Response (LINE) . . . . . . 5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB
Output (Level/Impedance)
REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 mV/2.2 kΩ
Tone Control
Setup microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AM loop antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
These operating instructions
BASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 dB (100 Hz)
TREBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 dB (10 kHz)
LOUDNESS . . . . . . . . . . . +4 dB/+2 dB (100 Hz/10 kHz)
(at volume position –40 dB)
Note
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio [EIA, at 1 W (1 kHz)]
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 dB
• Specifications and the design are subject to possible
modifications without notice, due to improvements.
Composite Video/S-Video Section
Cleaning the unit
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 dB
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Hz to 10 MHz
• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and
dirt.
• When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth
dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six
times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe
again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or
cleansers.
Component Video Section
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 dB
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Hz to 100 MHz
• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays or
other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will
corrode the surface.
HDMI Section
Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-pin x 3
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-pin (5 V, 100 mA)
102
En
Additional information
13
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
Used wisely, your new sound equipment will
provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since
hearing damage from loud noise is often
undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer
and the Electronic Industries Association’s
Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid
prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of
sound levels is included for your protection.
Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit
you’ve just purchased is only the start of your
musical enjoyment. Now it’s time to consider how
you can maximize the fun and excitement your
equipment offers. This manufacturer and the
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of
your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that
lets the sound come through loud and clear without
annoying blaring or distortion-and, most importantly,
without affecting your sensitive hearing.
Decibel
Level Example
30 Quiet library, soft whispers
40 Living room, refrigerator, bedroom away from traffic
50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office
60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine
70 Vacuum cleaner, hair dryer, noisy restaurant
80 Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock
at two feet.
Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing
“comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound.
So what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and
harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by
setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your
hearing adapts.
THE FOLLOWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS
UNDER CONSTANT EXPOSURE
90 Subway, motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower
100 Garbage truck, chain saw, pneumatic drill
120 Rock band concert in front of speakers,
thunderclap
To establish a safe level:
• Start your volume control at a low setting.
• Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it
comfortably and clearly, and without distortion.
140 Gunshot blast, jet plane
180 Rocket launching pad
Once you have established a comfortable sound
level:
• Set the dial and leave it there.
Information courtesy of the Deafness Research Foundation.
Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent
hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we
want you listening for a lifetime.
S001_En
103
En
Should this product require service in the U.S.A. and you
wish to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Independent
Service Company, or if you wish to purchase replacement
parts, operating instructions, service manuals, or
Si ce produit doit être réparé au Canada, veuillez vous
adresser à un distributeur autorisé Pioneer du Canada pour
obtenir le nom du Centre de Service Autorisé Pioneer le plus
près de chez-vous. Vous pouvez aussi contacter le Service à
la clientèle de Pioneer:
accessories, please call the number shown below.
1 – 8 0 0 – 4 2 1 – 1 4 0 4
Pioneer Électroniques du Canada, Inc.
Service Clientèle
Please do not ship your product to Pioneer without first
calling the Customer Support at the above listed number for
assistance.
300, Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2
1-877-283-5901
905-479-4411
Pioneer Electronics Service, Inc.
P.O. BOX 1760, Long Beach,
CA 90801-1760, U.S.A.
Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la garantie, veuillez
vous reporter au feuillet sur la garantie restreinte qui
accompagne le produit.
S018_C_EF
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty
sheet included with your product.
Should this product require service in Canada, please
contact a Pioneer Canadian Authorized Dealer to locate the
nearest Pioneer Authorized Service Company in Canada.
Alternatively, please contact the Customer Satisfaction
Department at the following address:
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.
Customer Satisfaction Department
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2
1-877-283-5901
905-479-4411
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty
sheet included with your product.
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_B_En
PIONEER, ELITE, SOUND.VISION.SOUL, and the Pioneer, Elite and
sound.vision.soul logos are trademarks of Pioneer Corporation.
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2008 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
<ARB7399-A>
Printed in
|